Quarterlytics / Technology / One

One

tne · ASX Technology
Claim this profile
Ticker tne
Exchange ASX
Sector Technology
Industry
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2021 Annual Report · One
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
2 0 2 1

Annual 
Report

UP 
43%

SaaS Annual
Recurring 
Revenue
up 43%

FY17 
$50.7M

FY18 
$70.4M

FY19 
$101.7M

FY20 
$134.6M

FY21 
$192.3M

SaaS Annual Recurring Revenue

UP 
19%

Profit
Before Tax
up 19%

FY17 
$58M

FY18 
$50.8M

FY19 
$76.4M

FY20 
$82.5M

FY21 
$97.8M

Reported Profit Before Tax

UP 
9%

FY17 
$231.1M

FY18 
$221M

FY19 
$241.8M

FY20 
$269.8M

FY21 
$293.6M

Revenue from SaaS & Continuing Business

31%

FY17 
21%

FY18 
22%

FY19 
27%

FY20 
28%

FY21  
31%

Profit Before Tax margin

These graphs should be read in conjunction with the  
Financial highlights table on p.13

Revenue from
SaaS & 
Continuing 
Business
up 9%

Profit Before  
Tax margin
31%

Transforming 
business, 
making life 
simple

What’s inside
Our History 

At a glance  

Financial highlights 

Letter to shareholders 

Global SaaS ERP solution 

Our strategy 

Our growth 

Our operations 

Our people 

TechnologyOne Foundation 

Financial statements 

Directors’ report 

Corporate governance statement 

Voluntary Tax Transparency Report 

Financial statements 

Directors’ declaration 

Auditor’s independence declaration 

Auditor’s report 

Shareholder information 

Corporate directory 

Corporate calendar 

7
8
13
15
23
29
35
39
53
67
73

75

107

116

118

146

147

148

153

154

155

5

Transforming business, making life simpleAt a GlanceOur History

1987

Adrian Di Marco founded 
TechnologyOne in a 
demountable office at a 
hide processing plant in 
an industrial suburb of 
Brisbane. We were one 
of the first tech start ups 
in Australia. Back then, 
there was no venture 
capital or private equity, 
so one of Adrian’s 
previous customers, 
the Mactaggart Family, 
provided the funding.

The idea was to build 
a new generation of 
software where the 
source code did not 
need to be customised 
for each customer, which 
was then the common 
practice. The software 
could be configured for 
each customer and the 
configuration sat outside 
the software. Because all 
customers used the same 
software we could then 
ship new releases every 
year, with new features 
and functionality. 

1995

TechnologyOne software 
was voted No 1 Software for 
Financial Management and 
Accounting by a survey of 
3000 CFOs by MIS magazine. 
TechnologyOne repeated 
this win, three years in a row. 
TechnologyOne broke away 
from the industry “reseller 
model” and adopted our 
unique Power of One model, 
taking responsibility to build, 
market, sell, implement and 
support its software.

1998

TechnologyOne broke away 
from the approach taken 
by global ERP vendors like 
Oracle and SAP of focusing 
on all markets, and focused 
on 6 vertical markets: 
Education, Local Government, 
Government, Health & 
Community Services, Asset & 
Project Intensive & Corporate 
& Financial Services. This 
allowed us to build deep 
functionality out of the box 
for these markets, to create 
a significant competitive 
advantage.

1991

TechnologyOne released 
its first product, called 
FinanceOne, using the 
Oracle relational database 
technology (RDBMS). 

1988

Adrian knew that using 
technology to get a 
competitive advantage 
would be the number one 
factor in our success, so 
he named the company 
TechnologyOne. 
TechnologyOne was one of 
the earliest developers in 
the world to use relational 
database technology.

1993

TechnologyOne made the 
decision to shift away from 
Oracle’s RDBMS, to become 
database-independent. That 
same year, TechnologyOne 
pivoted from being Best 
of Breed to become one 
of the first ERP vendors. 
TechnologyOne’s enterprise 
vision became a key 
differentiator, allowing it to 
deliver a single, integrated 
enterprise solution, built on 
a single modern platform, 
with a consistent look and 
feel. 

1996

With the rise of PCs, 
TechnologyOne became 
an early adopter of PCs 
for enterprise systems,  
rebuilding its suite of 
products in a new and 
emerging technology 
called client/server. That 
same year, FinanceOne for 
Windows was released. 

1999

TechnologyOne floated on the 
Australian Securities Exchange 
(ASX) in 1999. TechnologyOne 
was one of the first IT 
companies to become publicly 
listed and one of the most 
successful listings in 1999. 

2012

With the emergence of 
the cloud, TechnologyOne 
became an early adopter 
of the cloud for enterprise 
software, re-architecting our 
ERP system. We deliver a 
multi-tenanted global ERP 
SaaS system, providing huge 
economies of scale enabling 
us to take full responsibility 
for our customers - building, 
implementing and running 
our software for them.  Our 
customers are able to easily 
and seamlessly move from on 
premise to cloud. 

2015

TechnologyOne makes three 
acquisitions: ICON Software, 
Digital Mapping Solutions 
and Jeff Roorda & Associates. 
The acquisitions broadened 
the breadth and depth of 
TechnologyOne’s enterprise 
solutions, adding planning, 
spatial and strategic asset 
management functionality to 
our suite of products for Local 
Government and Higher 
Education markets. 

In the same year, Adrian 
Di Marco was listed on 
SmartCompany’s top 10 
most influential people in 
the Australian IT industry, 
inducted into the Pearcey 
Hall of Fame, and named as 
2015’s top 10 CEOs by AFR 
Boss magazine. 

2021

TechnologyOne made its 
first international acquisition, 
Scientia, as part of our 
strategic focus to deliver 
the deepest functionality for 
higher education becoming 
the only ERP provider in the 
world to offer this solution to 
the higher education market, 
as part of a full enterprise 
suite.

2002

TechnologyOne acquired 
Proclaim Pty Ltd, for 
its Property & Rating 
product extending 
TechnologyOne’s Local 
Government enterprise 
solution. 

2017

TechnologyOne launched 
the TechnologyOne 
Foundation, committing 
to raise 500,000 children 
and their families out of 
poverty. TechnologyOne 
also commited to the 1% 
Pledge – committing 1% 
of profit, staff time and 
products to its Foundation.

2003

With the emergence of the 
internet, TechnlogyOne 
became an early adopter, 
rebuilding our entire ERP 
system for the internet. 
TechnologyOne Ci 
(Connected Intelligence), 
was released.

2006

TechnologyOne released 
preconfigured solutions 
for each of our key vertical 
markets dramatically 
reducing the time, cost 
and risks associated with 
implementing its ERP 
software.

2014

TechnologyOne SaaS 
was released. With the 
emergence of mobile 
devices, TechnologyOne 
rebuilt our ERP systems 
to provide any device, 
anywhere and any 
time access. 100% of 
TechnologyOne ERP  
functionality is available 
across all devices including 
mobile phones. The new 
product Ci Anywhere was 
released in 2014.

In the same year, 
TechnologyOne hit $1 billion 
market capitalisation and 
entered the ASX 200 Index.

In the years since 
TechnologyOne 
was formed, the IT 
industry has changed 
dramatically. We have 
rebuilt the company 
and our products with 
each new generation of 
technology, taking us 
through four generations 
of product. 

Our success is in making 
life simple for our 
customers. 

Our History

7

Transforming business, making life simpleAt a 
glance

9

Transforming business, making life simpleAt a GlanceOur 
finances

UP

43%

SaaS ARR $192.3M

UP

14%

$142.9M Cash and cash 
equivalents

$77M

R&D investment up 13%  
(24% of revenue)

UP

19%

$97.8M Profit Before Tax

UP

Dividend of 13.91cps8%

$293.6M revenue from 
SaaS & continuing 
business

UP

9%

UP

34%

$190.2M 
Net assets

12YEARS

Continued record profit

31%

Profit Before  
Tax Margin

UP

16%

$257.5M  
Total ARR

$1.6MUK profit

UP

14%

Consulting  
Profit Before Tax

$500M

ARR

on track by 2026

Our vision

As the only company 
offering a true global 
Software as a Service 
(SaaS) ERP solution across 
the entire enterprise, we are 
transforming business and 
making life simple.  

Our difference

We are the only vendor that develops, 
sells, implements, supports and runs 
a fully integrated suite of enterprise 
software solutions. Our global SaaS ERP 
solutions span the entire enterprise and 
allow our customers to embrace the 
digital revolution and an exciting new 
world of possibilities in a cloud-first, 
mobile-first world.   

Our reach

TechnologyOne has a global presence 
throughout Australia, New Zealand, Asia 
and the United Kingdom. 

Our culture

At TechnologyOne, we believe in a 
culture of innovation, creativity and 
collaboration and have created an 
environment that allows our people 
to thrive. This culture is built into the 
fabric of our business, driving high 
performance and underpinning our 
success. 

Our international team is made up of 
more than 1,200 passionate individuals. 
We believe in investing in our people, 
and we do this with a wide range 
of initiatives such as O Week, One 
Talks, MARVEL awards and leadership 
courses.   

decisions we make, the people we 
employ and the processes we create. 
This is why we continue to invest in our 
Compelling Customer Experience (CCE) 
program, which provides our people 
with ongoing development and support 
in delivering outstanding customer 
experiences.  

To foster a customer-oriented culture, 
we developed the Compelling Customer 
Experience program. The program 
supports and encourages our team 
members so that they can deliver 
outstanding customer service every day.  

Providing a compelling customer 
experience is fundamental to the way 
TechnologyOne does business and 
positions us well to attract customers 
away from our competitors. 

Our market-leading 
solutions and products

As the leading supplier of enterprise 
software solutions for more than 
1,200 large-scale companies, and with 
more than 30 years’ success in the 
business, we have developed a deep 
understanding of our key markets.   

We offer our customers a range 
of industry-leading preconfigured 
enterprise solutions. Our solutions 
streamline implementations, reducing 
time, cost and risk for customers. We 
also offer a comprehensive suite of 
enterprise software products.   

Our Markets
• 

Local Government 

Education  

Federal Government 

Asset and Project Intensive 
industries 

Corporates and Financial Services 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

Compelling Customer 
experience

We continue to recognise that our 
customers are our compass for the 

Our preconfigured 
solutions
• 

OneCouncil  

• 

OneEducation 

• 

• 

• 

• 

OneGovernment 

OneCare 

OneAsset 

OneCorporate 

Our products
• 

Corporate Performance 
Management 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

Enterprise Content Management 

Human Resources & Payroll 

Spatial  

Supply Chain Management 

Strategic Asset Management 

Enterprise Cash Receipting 

Enterprise Asset Management 

Financials 

Property & Rating 

Student Management 

Business Analytics 

Enterprise Budgeting 

Performance Planning

Timetabling and Scheduling 
(Syllabus Plus)

Our research & 
development

We continue to focus our Research 
& Development (R&D) efforts on new 
and emerging technologies, including 
cloud-based technologies, artificial 
intelligence, machine learning and other 
innovations. Our Australian-owned 
commercial R&D centre is the largest 
of its kind, with offshoot facilities in 
Indonesia and Vietnam.  

We are committed to a continuous cycle 
of redeveloping our software platform 
from the ground up. This process leaves 
no line of code untouched and ensures 
that we are free to embrace new ideas, 
concepts and technologies—rather than 
needing to retain legacy systems. Over 
the past 30 years we have completely 
redeveloped our software platform four 
times. 

11

Health and Community Services 

New ideas, new concepts 

Transforming business, making life simpleAt a GlanceFinancial 
highlights

 2021 
$’000s

2020 
$’000s

Growth on 
last year

15-year 
compound 
growth

2019 
$’000s

2018** 
$’000s

2017 
$’000s

2016 
$’000s

2015 
$’000s

2014 
$’000s

2013 
$’000s

2012 
$’000s

Reported Comparable

Reported

SaaS & 
Continuing 
Business

 293,553 

269,774

9%

 241,790 

 221,046 

 231,151 

 192,657 

 175,279 

 140,024 

 128,226 

 117,567 

Total revenue

 312,012 

 299,018 

4%

10%

 286,164 

 254,491 

 273,253 

 249,018 

 218,724 

 195,124 

 180,591 

 169,070 

Annual 
Recurring 
revenue (ARR)1

 257,495 

 221,908 

16%

 202,480 

 173,912 

 153,896 

 126,996 

 108,853 

 -   

 -   

 -   

SaaS ARR1

 192,295 

 134,557 

43%

 101,677 

 70,372 

 50,701 

 24,486 

 14,265 

 -   

 -   

 -   

R&D 
Investment

Underlying 
Profit Before 
Tax2

Net Profit 
Before Tax

Net Profit After 
Tax

Earnings Per 
Share (Cents)

Total Dividends 
(cents per 
share)

Dividend 
Payout ratio

Return on 
Equity

Cash and Cash 
equivalents

 77,005 

68,062

13%

13%

 60,124 

 54,042 

 49,856 

 46,009 

 41,038 

 37,873 

 35,595 

 33,524 

 97,843 

 86,070 

14%

12%

 76,389 

 50,807 

 58,019 

 53,240 

 46,494 

 40,235 

 35,097 

 30,324 

 97,844 

 82,470 

19%

12%

 76,389 

 50,807 

 58,019 

 53,240 

 46,494 

 40,235 

 35,097 

 30,324 

 72,691 

 62,945 

15%

12%

 58,459 

 47,681 

 44,494 

 41,344 

 35,785 

 30,967 

 26,984 

 23,559 

 22.64 

 19.75 

15%

 18.43 

 15.10 

 14.18 

 13.26 

 11.57 

 10.06 

 8.78 

 7.73 

 13.91 

 12.88 

8%

10%

 11.93 

 11.02 

 10.20 

 9.45 

 8.78 

 8.16 

 5.60 

 5.09 

62%

65%

65%

73%

72%

72%

76%

81%

64%

66%

38%

44%

55%

46%

28%

31%

30%

30%

31%

32%

 142,853 

 125,244 

14%

12%

 105,046 

 104,322 

 93,383 

 82,588 

 75,536 

 80,209 

 65,397 

 51,133 

Net Assets

 190,234 

 142,168 

34%

11%

 106,857 

 103,480 

 157,520 

 138,494 

 117,940 

 104,499 

 87,736 

 73,997 

The table above shows previously reported results to FY17. Results for those years have not been restated for AASB15. 

*Before capitalisation. 

**2018 Comparable applies AASB15. It also assumes non-IFRS pro forma capitalisation of R&D costs (50%) for the FY18 year and is unaudited. As a SaaS company, R&D costs are capitalised from FY19 onwards, which is the common  

practice of our SaaS peers. We measure our performance using the comparable method because it is a better reflection of the performance of our business, setting a higher bar for the prior comparable period (FY18) than the statutory 

reporting. It allows for a ‘like for like’ comparison of the performance of the business, assuming R&D costs (50%) were capitalised in FY18. This is the basis used for all comparable reporting throughout this document.

1ARR is not an IFRS measure and is unaudited, it represents future contracted annual revenue at year end.

2Underlying profit excludes impact of once-off increased provision for a civil employment matter of $3.6m.

Financial Statement

13

Transforming business, making life simpleLetter to 
shareholders

15

Transforming business, making life simpleLetter to shareholdersLetter to shareholders

On behalf of Technology One Limited (TechnologyOne) we are 
pleased to announce our twelfth consecutive year of record profit, 
record revenues, and record SaaS fees. 

Our global SaaS ERP solution is transforming our customers’ 
business and makes life simple for them. 

Highlights for the Year 

• 

• 

• 

Profit Before Tax up 19% - Our 
Profit Before Tax was up 19%, 
which was at the top end of 
guidance, underpinned by the 
continuing fast growth of the 
TechnologyOne global SaaS ERP 
solution. 

TechnologyOne SaaS ARR 
up 43% organically - The 
TechnologyOne global SaaS ERP 
solution is growing rapidly, with 
SaaS annual recurring revenue 
(ARR) of $192.3m, up 43%. 

End of on-premise business 
by October 2024 - During the 
year we achieved a watershed 
milestone and announced the end 
of our on-premise business by 
October 2024, which will further 
drive our SaaS business. 

• 

• 

$500m+ ARR by FY26 - With our 
fast-growing SaaS business and 
the announcement of the end 
of our on-premise business, we 
are on track to hit our target of 
$500m+ ARR by FY26. Given the 
current ARR is $257.5m, this is 
an additional $242.5m of Annual 
Recurring Revenue in the next five 
years.

Revenue from SaaS & Continuing 
Business was up 9% - This is our 
future state business. By FY24 we 
expect our total business to be 
growing by 15+% per annum.

These points are discussed later in 
more detail.

Results summary

Key results were as follows: 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

Profit Before Tax of $97.8m, up 19%1

Revenue from our SaaS and Continuing 
Business of $293.6m, up 9%

SaaS Annual Recurring Revenue (ARR)2,5 of 
$192.3m, up 43%

Total Annual Recurring Revenue (ARR)2,5 of 
$257.5m, up 16%

Total Revenue3 of $312.0m, up 4% 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

Expenses of $214.2m, down 1% 

Cash Flow Generation4,5 of $63.9m, up 12%

Cash and Cash Equivalents of $142.9m, up 
14%

Total Dividend of 13.91cps, up 8% 

R&D investment5 of $77.0m before 
capitalisation, up 13%, which is 24% of revenue

1 Profit Before Tax of $97.8m was up 14% on FY20 Underlying Profit Before Tax
2 ARR represents future contracted annual revenue at year end.
3 Includes other income of $0.7m
4 Cash Flow Generation is cash flow from operating activities less capitalised development costs, capitalised commission 
costs and lease payments. 
5This is a non-IFRS financial measure and is unaudited

17

Transforming business, making life simpleLetter to shareholdersContinuing strong performance

TechnologyOne has consistently delivered strong results since listing on the ASX in 1999. Our ability to deliver these results for 
20+ years is due to our clear vision, strategy, culture and our significant investment in R&D. This is discussed in more detail in 
Our Strategy section on page 29. 

We see continuing strong growth in the future and expect to double in size again in the next five years. 

 NPAT up 15%

FY11

FY13
FY12
$20.3m $23.6m $27m

FY14
$31m $35.8m $41.3m $44.5m $51m $58.5m $62.9m $72.7m

FY20

FY16

FY19

FY15

FY18

FY21

FY17

Reported Net Profit After tax

TechnologyOne SaaS 
ARR grows 43% 
organically

The TechnologyOne global SaaS ERP 
solution is growing rapidly, with SaaS 
ARR of $192.3m, up 43%. This growth is 
all organic and includes no acquisitions.

We added approximately 100 enterprise 
customers this year to our global SaaS 
ERP solution and we now have 637 
large scale enterprise customers, with 
hundreds of thousands of users; making 
it the largest single instance SaaS ERP 
offering in Australia. 

Our global SaaS ERP solution 
is delivering a compelling value 
proposition for our customers providing 
them any device, any time access from 
anywhere around the globe, as well as 
a simple and cost-effective way to run 
their enterprise. This is allowing our 
customers to innovate and meet the 
challenges ahead with greater agility 
and speed, without having to worry 
about underlying technologies. We take 

care of all of this, making life simple for 
them. This is discussed in more detail 
in the global SaaS ERP section on page 
23. 

This year we continued to win new, 
large enterprise customers from our 
competitors. 30+ organisations replaced 
our competitors’ systems, including 
systems from Oracle, SAP, Microsoft, 
Tribal and Workday. 

TechnologyOne continued to dominate 
in the Local Government sector, where 
we closed 20 major deals with $25m+ in 
total contract value. We have more than 
300 council customers in APAC. 

In the Higher Education sector, we 
closed 10 major deals with $30m+ in 
total contract value, cementing our 
position as the dominant provider to the 
APAC Higher Education sector.

UP 
43%

FY17 

FY18 

FY19 

FY20 

FY21 

$50.7M

$70.4M

$101.7M

$134.6M

$192.3M

SaaS Annual Recurring Revenue

End of on premise

During the year we announced the end 
of our on-premise business by October 
2024. This watershed milestone gives 
our remaining on-premise customers 
ample time to make the transition 
to our global SaaS ERP solution. 
TechnologyOne has made the transition 
to our SaaS solution for our on-premise 
customers simple and seamless. They 
can move to SaaS in weeks, not years 
like those using our competitors’ 
products. We expect 90%+ of all our 
remaining on-premise customers to 
move to our SaaS solution, driving the 
growth of our SaaS business.  

By transitioning to SaaS, our on-premise 
customers will unlock the significant 
benefits that our SaaS customers 
already receive including: 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

Two releases automatically 
available each year providing new 
functionality 

Eight active data centres 

Defence in depth security with the 
highest levels of cyber security 
certification

Always on the latest release

Always on the latest technology

All products and modules 
available, so that our customers 
can take on additional products 
without friction

Save 30%+ on their total cost of 
ownership  

From here, they can easily move 
to our next generation product, Ci 
Anywhere (CiA) and take advantage 
of new technologies, such as Artificial 
Intelligence and our new Digital 
Experience Platform (DXP), which we 
are in the process of developing.

On track to hit $500m+ 
ARR by FY26

Our SaaS business continues to grow 
quickly. The quality of this revenue 
stream is exceptionally high, given its 
recurring contractual nature, combined 
with our very low churn rate of ~1%.

Combined with our announcement of 
the end of our on-premise business, this 
is driving our Annual Recurring Revenue 
growth.  

Our Total ARR is $257.5m, up 16%. We 
are on track to hit our target of $500m+ 
ARR by FY26. Given the current ARR is 
$257.5m, this is an additional $242.5m 
of annual recurring revenue in the next 
Five Years.

Our ARR stands at 90% of Total 
Revenue1 which means the majority of 
our revenue is locked in at the start of 
the financial year. This positions us well 
to achieve strong continuing growth in 
the new year.

Our future state business 
is expected to grow at 
15%+ per annum in the 
next few years, with the 
cessation of our on-
premise business

Total Revenue was up 4%, but this is 
not a true indication of our growth, as 
it includes our legacy licence business, 
which we are aggressively reducing as 
we grow our SaaS business.

As planned, our legacy licence business 
was down 38% ($10.8m), as we continue 
to build our SaaS business and walk 
away from traditional on-premise 
licences. 

If we remove the legacy licence 
business from both FY21 and FY20, our 
Revenue from SaaS and Continuing 
Business, which is a key measure of the 
strength of our business, has grown 9%.

We expect by FY24 our Total Revenue 
will be growing by 15%+ per annum 
with the cessation of our on-premise 
business.

UK delivers Profit Before 
Tax of $1.6m, versus 
breakeven in the prior 
year

The UK regionalisation of our 
global SaaS ERP solution is nearing 
completion, and we have seen our UK 
business continue to grow, with SaaS 
ARR of $9.0m up 20%. We delivered a 
profit of $1.6 million versus a breakeven 
result last year and we see significant 
opportunities in the coming years. 

Consulting Profit Before 
Tax of $15.6m, up 14%

Our Consulting division delivered 
Profit Before Tax of $15.6 million, up 

14% through continued improvement 
in culture, systems and processes, 
and disciplined use of our Solution 
Implementation Methodology. The 
turnaround of the UK Consulting 
division continued during the year, with 
efficiency improving to deliver a profit 
of $1m versus a breakeven result last 
year. The total Consulting division’s 
Profit Before Tax margin has improved 
from 7% in 2017 to 24% in 2021. Our 
Application Managed Services business 
for existing customers is moving to 
recurring revenue, with $19.7million now 
locked in as recurring revenue2. 

Investment in R&D up 
13% 

TechnologyOne invested $77.0 million 
in R&D this year, up 13%. This was 
significantly higher than our normal 
benchmark of R&D growth of 8%, as we 
took the opportunity to accelerate R&D 
into a number of new and exciting areas.

We continued to invest in new, exciting 
ideas and innovations, including our 
new Digital Experience Platform (DXP) 
for Local Government and Higher 
Education. The first phase of our Local 
Government DXP was shipped in 2021. 
Customer feedback has been excellent 
and our DXP will set the new standard 
for ERP.

This year we elevated our Federal 
Government customers to a new cyber 
security level, as we delivered our 
global SaaS ERP solution with IRAP 
PROTECTED certification. We continue 
to invest millions of dollars and set the 
bar higher each year as we deliver 
the most trusted SaaS solution to our 
customers. It is not feasible for individual 
organisations to keep up with increasing 
costs and complexity of cyber security 
unless they have adopted a SaaS-first 
strategy.

Our R&D is also focused on extending 
the functionality and capabilities of our 
global SaaS ERP solution. 

Our R&D program continues to be at 
the leading edge of our industry, as 
we embrace new technologies, new 
concepts and new paradigms. 

We expect R&D growth over the 
next few years to return back to the 
benchmark growth of 8% or less.

1 Excludes consulting revenue as it flows from business wins and is based on opening ARR of $221.9m. 
2Not included in our Total ARR.

19

Transforming business, making life simpleLetter to shareholdersAcquisition of Scientia 

In September, we acquired Scientia Resource Management 
Limited (Scientia), a United Kingdom company servicing the 
higher education sector. The impact on our FY21 profit was 
insignificant.

This acquisition forms part of our strategic focus to deliver 
the deepest functionality for Higher Education and it will 
accelerate our growth and competitive position in the UK, 
as well as have significant benefits in the Australian Higher 
Education market.

Scientia’s market-leading product, Syllabus Plus, provides 
mission critical advanced academic timetabling and resource 
scheduling for over 150 leading universities across the United 
Kingdom and Australia.

The acquisition further expands our global SaaS ERP solution 
for Higher Education. The integration of Scientia’s advanced 
academic timetabling and resource scheduling capabilities, 
combined with our market-leading Student Management, 
HR & Payroll, Enterprise Asset Management and Finance 
capabilities, will provide smarter decision-making for 
customers, eliminating underutilisation of space and resources 
that is paramount for Higher Education across the globe in a 
post-COVID world.

This is our first international acquisition and demonstrates 
our deep commitment to both Higher Education and the UK 
market. The unique IP and market-leading functionality of 
Syllabus Plus supports our vision of delivering enterprise 
software that is incredibly easy to use and that substantially 
enhances our customers’ experience in the Higher Education 
sector. We are excited about the opportunities this will bring to 
both our UK and Australian customers in the coming years.

Strong balance sheet and cashflows

TechnologyOne continues to have a strong balance sheet 
with net assets of $190.2 million, up 34% and cash and cash 
equivalents of $142.9 million, up 14% after making the initial 
payment for the Scientia acquisition of $11.6 million. Cash 
flow generation was once again strong at $63.9 million for 
the full year, versus a Net Profit After Tax of $72.7 million. 
TechnologyOne continues its long history of strong cash flow 
generation, which we expect to progressively grow to match 
Net Profit After Tax in FY24.

Profit Before Tax margin increases to 
31%

Profit Before Tax margin increased to 31% compared to 28% 
for the prior year. We see margins continuing to improve to 
35%+ in the coming years, driven by the significant economies 
of scale from our single instance, multi-tenanted global SaaS 
ERP solution.

We are on track to double the size of our business once again 
in the next five years.

FY21
31%

FY12
18%

FY13
19%

FY14
21%

FY15
21%

FY16
21%

FY17
21%

FY18
22%

FY19
27%

FY20
29%

FY21
31%

Profit Before Tax Margin

Dividend

In light of the company’s strong results, and our confidence 
going forward, the dividend for the full year has increased to 
13.91 cents per share, up 8% on the prior year.

Executive remuneration

TechnologyOne remains focused on delivering strong growth 
and our current remuneration structure positions us well to 
continue to achieve this both in the short and long-term, as 
well as ensuring alignment across our Executive KMP.

At a time when many businesses have struggled during the 
pandemic, TechnologyOne has delivered exceptional growth 
as follows: organic SaaS ARR growth of 43%, Net Profit Before 
Tax growth of 19%, the UK achieving profit of $1.6 million and 
Consulting profit growth of 14%. 

There is clear alignment between the performance of the 
business and executive remuneration. FY21 total executive 
KMP remuneration grew by 12%, while the company’s Profit 
Before Tax grew by 19%.

Environment, Social, Governance (ESG)

TechnologyOne is committed to its ESG obligations, beyond 
just regulatory requirements. Last year, TechnologyOne 
became officially Carbon Neutral and this year is our first year 
benchmarking and reporting under the recommendations 
of the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures 
(TCFD).

While the TechnologyOne operations do not have a material 
impact on the environment, we acknowledge that it is the 
changing attitude of many that will have a material impact on 
reducing climate change. 

Please refer to the Company’s website at:    
https://www.technologyonecorp.com/company/investors/
corporate-governance for our Sustainability Report and 
Corporate Governance Statement.

Corporate Governance - Board renewal

Given TechnologyOne is such a significant R&D and 
innovation-led business, coupled with our long track record 
of profitable growth, we have taken a cautious and measured 
approach to the renewal of our Board, to ensure a smooth 
transition. We have made good progress again this year 
with the appointment of a new and highly experienced 
independent director, Mr Pat O’Sullivan, who holds a number 
of directorships for ASX-listed technology companies. Mr Pat 
O’Sullivan has been appointed Lead Independent Director 
and Deputy Chair. We now have a majority of independent 
directors. 

TechnologyOne Foundation

The TechnologyOne Foundation defines who we are as a 
company and is an important driver of our culture and values.

We are committed to making a difference to underprivileged 
and at-risk youths, by empowering them to transform their 
lives and create their own pathways of success. We believe 
that it is through youth that we can have the greatest impact 
on the future. We have an ambitious goal of lifting 500,000 
children and their families out of poverty, which we are on 
track to achieve. 

An important part of the TechnologyOne Foundation is 
supporting great Australians doing great work, both locally and 
internationally, which includes the Fred Hollows Foundation, 
School of St Jude, Opportunity International Australia, Solar 
Buddy and St James College. 

The Foundation will continue to grow with TechnologyOne 
through our commitment to the 1% pledge – which includes 
1% profit, 1% product and 1% time. This represents a $2m + 
commitment each year. The Foundation will continue to shape 
the DNA of our company and staff. This is discussed in more 
detail in the TechnologyOne Foundation section on page 67.

Our people and culture

Our people solve incredibly complex business problems for 
our customers and have delivered our massively broad and 
deep global SaaS ERP. We compete and win against the 
world’s largest multinational software companies, who have 
R&D teams with tens of thousands of staff.

We continue to invest in our people and culture initiatives, 
including our award-winning programs such as O week, 
graduate program, Buddy program, Hack Days, Town Halls 
and Regional Days, to highlight a few. We also recognise 
those team members who live our values and demonstrate 
the TechnologyOne Way through our annual MARVEL awards. 
During the year we were able to hold a Company Kick Off, 
which was a whole-of-company event for team members to 
hear from our leaders about the future of our products and 
services, and to reconnect with each other after COVID-19 
lockdowns. 

TechnologyOne conducts a continual eNPS survey to measure 
each team and to build our strong and unique culture. All of 
these initiatives have resulted in TechnologyOne being once 
again independently recognized as an employer of choice.  
This is discussed in more detail in the Our People section on 
page 53.

Outlook for FY 2022

As we have seen over the last few years, the enterprise 
software market continues to remain resilient, with our 
products providing our customers the opportunity to reduce 
their costs, streamline their business and improve their 
efficiencies in a challenging economic time. 

The TechnologyOne global SaaS ERP solution is driving 
our continuing success. As a result, TechnologyOne’s sales 
pipeline of opportunities for 2022 is strong and this positions 
us for continuing strong profit growth in FY22. 

Our SaaS business will continue to grow strongly and 
profitably.

We also expect to see continuing strong growth in the UK 
market.

The company will provide further guidance at both the Annual 
General Meeting and with the FY22 first half results.

Afterword

To continue to succeed we must continue to innovate and 
focus on building beautiful software that is incredibly simple 
and easy for our customers to use. Our software must work 
on any device, anywhere, at any time if we are to enable our 
customers to embrace the exciting future that is possible with 
the digital revolution. 

Also, we must continue to earn the right to be the enterprise 
software partner for our customers. At every touchpoint 
we have with our customers, we must strive to make things 
simpler for them and give them a great experience.

A few years ago, we set an ambitious goal to transform 
business and make life simple for our customers. We are now 
making this a reality. 

This would not be possible without the talented and 
committed people who make up TechnologyOne.

We would also like to thank you, our shareholders, for your 
continuing support.

Adrian Di Marco

Edward Chung

Executive Chairman 

Chief Executive Officer

21

Transforming business, making life simpleLetter to shareholders 
Global SaaS 
ERP solution

23

Transforming business, making life simpleGlobal SaaS ERP SolutionTechnologyOne’s global SaaS ERP 
solution delivers the full functionality of 
ERP on any device, without compromise. 
Our Software as a Service (SaaS) runs 
one global code line, allowing us to 
continuously deliver new innovations 
to our customers, who benefit from the 
scale of our investment as an enterprise 
vendor. 

Our SaaS ERP solution is a single 
instance of software, one single global 
code line, run on thousands of servers, 
at massive scale, for all customers. 
Because of this, we gain enormous 
economies of scale, allowing us to 
continuously deliver new innovations 
to customers. Every customer benefits 
from each dollar we invest, amounting 
to $77 million investment in R&D in 
FY21. 

Our solution leads the market 
because we own, build and support 
our own software. We take complete 
responsibility for providing the 
processing power, software and 
services, including backup, recovery, 
upgrade and support services for our 
SaaS customers. Other ERP providers 
fail to deliver the same economies of 
scale and cost efficiencies because they 
use cloud hosting but handcraft each 
customer’s environment individually. 
Our solution delivers the deepest 
functionality for the markets we serve, 
comprising 14 products and up to 30 
modules per product. 

Our global SaaS ERP surpasses best-of-
breed cloud products because we offer 
one partner, one integrated solution, 
one look and feel, one technology 
platform and integration out of the box. 

Our SaaS ERP solution is a single 
instance of software delivered globally, 
with a mass production line of servers 
running thousands of customers’ 
organisations. It produces substantial 
economies of scale, creating cost 
efficiencies that hosting providers 
cannot come close to, and a level of 
service, security, reliability, scalability 
and future proofing that would not be 
otherwise possible. 

TechnologyOne makes a substantial 
investment each year in ongoing R&D, 
to continue to improve our software 
and to capitalise on new technologies, 
concepts and ideas. Our global SaaS 
ERP solution provides a compelling 
value proposition to our customers, 

giving them what is essentially a 
very simple, cost effective and highly 
scalable model of computing. 

Our customers are always on the latest 
technology, with access to two releases 
of software per year that delivers new 
features, functionality and concepts, as 
well as access to the TechnologyOne 
University for ‘just-in-time’ training. This 
is all provided standard as part of our 
SaaS solution, and we guarantee it will 
be future proof. Our current release, 
2021B, unlocks the potential of Ci 
Anywhere, providing customers with 
greater flexibility to work on any device, 
anywhere, at any time. 

For existing customers, the migration 
from on-premise to SaaS is seamless, 
with no loss of functionality or 
complicated re-implementations 
required. The accelerated transition 
allows them to immediately save 
up to 30+ per cent on their total 
cost, so they can focus on their 
business, not on technology. With our 
configuration-driven software design, 
all our customers’ unique configuration 
information is stored in their own 
dedicated and secure database. This 
is also the case for our customers’ 
transactional data, allowing us deliver 
personalised service at scale. 

Our approach to SaaS ERP is a key part 
of TechnologyOne’s ongoing success, 
with SaaS revenue now representing 48 
per cent of our total revenue. In FY21, 
we gained approximately 100 new SaaS 
customers, joining many of our long-
standing customers on the journey from 
on-premise to cloud-based solutions. 

Our current release of TechnologyOne 
SaaS, 2021B, continues to deliver further 
economies of scale and enhanced 
security. We are now working on the 
next generation of our SaaS solution, 
2022A. The pace at which we are 
innovating is accelerating, and we are 
seeing many opportunities to continue 
to improve the features, speed, security, 
availability and scalability of our SaaS 
solution for our customers. 

TechnologyOne is at the very forefront of delivering the benefits 
of mass production to the enterprise software industry. As we 
have seen in other industries, the economies of scale of mass 
production will change the face of the software industry. 

Global SaaS  
ERP solution

The power of a single integrated ERP solution, built on a single modern 
platform with a consistent look and feel and user experience. 

25

Transforming business, making life simpleGlobal SaaS ERP SolutionRealising our vision as a 
SaaS-first company 

Ten years ago, we started our journey 
to SaaS, by committing to building a 
software solution that would operate 
anywhere, any time, on any device. 
We set an aspirational goal to develop 
the next generation of ERP software, 
to transform our customers through a 
digital platform. Today, that solution is Ci 
Anywhere, delivered via SaaS. 

Over the last five years, our customers 
have validated this strategy with the 
overwhelming adoption of SaaS. Our 
customers report transitioning to SaaS 
has allowed them to become more agile 
and more importantly, gives them the 
ability to focus on their customers and 
not on their technology. 

We now know that SaaS is the future, 
and the only way to provide our 
customers with the experience they 
need to succeed. 

That’s why we’ve transitioned the 
majority of our on-premise customers to 
our SaaS Platform, providing them with 
a digital platform for evolution. 

This year marked a significant milestone 
in our journey to becoming a full SaaS 
company, as we committed to moving 
all remaining on-premise customers to 
SaaS by 2024. 

We will work closely with our on-
premise customers on their pathway 
to SaaS over the next three years, to 
ensure no customer is left behind. 

This shift will not only allow us to realise 
our vision as a full SaaS company, 
but will enable us to better focus our 

637 customers have chosen 
TechnologyOne SaaS to 
power their organisations. 
This is an increase of 
more than 18 per cent 
in customer numbers 
over the past 12 months, 
and we expect this rapid 
growth to accelerate as we 
power towards our 2024 
milestone. 

resources on developing and delivering 
our products, new enhancements and 
innovations on a single platform.

The benefits of SaaS are 
too big to ignore

To better understand the 30%+ our 
customer save by moving to SaaS, 
we commissioned IBRS and Insight 
Economics to undertake research for 
us. The research has validated our 
SaaS-first strategy, but more importantly, 
provided us with a platform to be a true 
industry thought leader in the SaaS 
space – with the findings proving too 
big to ignore.

The research uncovered a game-
changing $252 billion saving over the 
next 10 years, as the direct benefit 
potential of our key industries moving to 
SaaS. That’s $224 billion in Net Present 
Value terms (NPV). The evidence 
confirms that SaaS has the potential to 
deliver substantial cost savings, which 
can be redirected to critical investment 
in infrastructure and services for 
Australia’s growth.

Across our industries, that translated to: 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

Local Government: $8.4 billion

Higher Education: $8.4 billion

State and Federal Government: 
$62.4 billion

Health and Aged Care: $23.7 
billion

Corporate and Financial Services: 
$59.2 billion

Asset and Project Intensive 
Industries: $61.9 billion

By uncovering the significance of 
the market opportunities presented 
by SaaS, we now have a key role in 
the discussion around how digital 
technology can power Australia’s future 
economic growth.

Any device, anywhere,  
at any time

Our award-winning Ci Anywhere 
platform delivers a single solution 
for our key verticals, that enables 
possibilities now and in the future. CiA 
is the path forward for our customers 
and provides a springboard for future 
innovations. 

Through Ci Anywhere, customers gain 
access to the full functionality of our 
enterprise software on any device, 
anywhere, at any time. 

Organisations can embrace iPad, 
iPhone and Android devices as part 
of their enterprise solution and our 
adaptive screen design guarantees a 
great user experience regardless of the 
device. Because the experience is tied 
to the user, not the device, an employee 
can move seamlessly from one device 
to another without interrupting their 
work. With its incredibly simple design, 
CiA has created a new standard 
in enterprise software, giving us a 
significant competitive advantage. 
For customers undertaking digital 
transformations, this is the key to future 
success. 

DXP (Digital Experience 
Platform) 

The experience your customers 
demand 

TechnologyOne’s Digital Experience 
Platform (DXP) extends the power of 
enterprise software for our customers. It 
enables organisations to empower their 
customers with personalised outcomes, 
providing a simplified digital experience 
using next generation technologies 
such as Artificial Intelligence (AI) and 
machine learning (ML).

It is a frictionless experience and 
leverages the power of enterprise 
software. DXP will digitally enable every 
stakeholder throughout an organisation 
- be it an employee, customer, supplier, 
student or rate payer - substantially 
streamlining their business and 
improving their experience. 

TechnologyOne has released our Local 
Government DXP to our pilot customer, 
and is continuing to work on the 
development of our Student DXP. 

Our commitment to 
innovation 

In FY21, we invested $77 million in R&D 
to improve our SaaS offering with new 
enhancements and innovations. 

Our Software as a Service runs one 
global code line, allowing us to 
continuously deliver new innovations 

to our customers, who benefit from the 
scale of our investment as an enterprise 
vendor. With each new customer, our 
solution is enriched with new IP that 
powers the evolution of our software. 

and privacy. As part of this program 
we develop and maintain our security 
framework, which passes the most 
stringent external verification, testing and 
scrutiny. 

The economies of scale offered by 
our global SaaS ERP solution mean 
that when a customer signs up to our 
service, they receive far more than what 
they pay for. Each customer benefits 
from the hundreds of millions of dollars 
that we have invested to date and our 
commitment to continued investment. 
We take care of patching and upgrades, 
and offer two major software releases 
per year. 

Our SaaS offering is massively scalable, 
resilient and fault-tolerant. All our 
customers run the same code-line 
globally, and all processing resources are 
shared. When we make an improvement 
to the service we automatically roll out 
that improvement to all our customers. 

It is a testament to the collective skill 
of our people and organisational 
structure that we have achieved such 
a competitive advantage and level of 
differentiation in the SaaS market. 

Insights—our SaaS monitoring platform—
gives us unprecedented visibility of the 
real-time performance and reliability of 
our SaaS environments and software. 
This enables us to analyse, detect 
and respond to issues faster than 
ever before. Insights also strengthens 
our support processes by connecting 
our development teams directly with 
customers. 

Most trusted SaaS ERP 
provider

We take the privacy and security of 
our customers’ data very seriously and 
weave this consideration into the fabric 
of everything we do. We are committed 
to building the world’s most trusted 
cloud for enterprise software and will 
continue to make significant investments 
to that end. That’s why, since 2017, we 
have achieved the highest level security 
accreditation of any SaaS ERP vendor 
operating in Australia. 

The foundation of our global SaaS ERP 
solution is a class-leading security and 
compliance program designed to give 
our customers the strongest protection 

Customers receive the benefit of these 
certifications, along with ongoing security 
and privacy enhancements, at no extra 
charge. 

Standard 

TechnologyOne 

Infor 

Workday 

SAP

IRAP (OFFICIAL) 

IRAP (PROTECTED) 

NZ IRD SPS 13/01 

ISO/IEC 27001:2013 

ISO/IEC 27017:2015 

ISO/IEC 27018:2014 

ISAE 3402 SOC1 

AT-C 205 SOC2 

AT-C 205 SOC3 

SSAE 18 

Cyber Essentials Plus (UK)  

TechnologyOne University

TechnologyOne University is the learning 
and training hub for our software. 
Through the power of SaaS, all of our 
customers can receive self-paced 
learning and comprehensive training on 
any device, anywhere, at any time. 

An innovative digital learning solution, 
TechnologyOne University gives our 
customers a dynamic, real-time and 
up-to-date self-service support and 
education option that empowers users at 
all levels.

27

Transforming business, making life simpleGlobal SaaS ERP SolutionOur 
strategy

29

Transforming business, making life simpleOur StrategyOur vision

Transforming business, 
making life simple

Our vision is to build and deliver truly 
great products and services that 
transform business and make life simple 
for our customers. Our core beliefs 
allow us to deliver on this vision. 

Over more than three 
decades, TechnologyOne’s 
clear vision, our beliefs, 
our people, our supporting 
initiatives and our 
continuing growth have 
underpinned our success. 

At TechnologyOne, we know that our 
customers’ experiences define our 
success. We believe in leadership, 
not management. We know that our 
survival depends on our ability to 
set ambitious goals, and to lead and 
inspire our people to achieve great 
things. As a large, successful company, 
we also believe it is important to give 
back to the community. To pay our 
success forward, we established the 
TechnologyOne Foundation. 

Our beliefs, dedication to customer 
experience, leadership model and 
charitable ethos have formed our vision. 
This is the TechnologyOne Way, which 
we developed more than 30 years ago 
and continues to define the way we 
operate. 

31

Transforming business, making life simpleOur StrategyOur core beliefs

We believe in:
Global 
SaaS ERP 
solution

The 
Power  
of One

Deepest 
functionality 
for the 
markets  
we serve

The 
power  
of 
evolution

Simplicity, 
not 
complexity

Global SaaS ERP Solution 

We believe in the power of a single, 
integrated ERP solution built on a 
modern platform with a consistent look 
and feel and user experience. 

A best-in-class enterprise solution 

Only through an enterprise solution 
can organisations embrace the future 
of digital technologies and unlock the 
efficiencies they need across their entire 
organisation. We have spent more than 
30 years and hundreds of millions of 
dollars to deliver on this enterprise-wide 
vision. Today, we deliver best-in-class 
products that come together as a total 
enterprise solution from a single vendor. 

In the SaaS world we have seen the 
proliferation of ‘best-of-breed’ products. 
We are confident, just as we have seen 
in the past for on-premise customers, 
that we will see a move from best-of-
breed products to enterprise software 
solutions in the cloud, given the 
significant benefits it will provide: one 
vendor, one user interface, one common 
technology architecture, and integration 
across all products. As TechnologyOne 
is one of only a few enterprise SaaS 
vendors globally, this positions us for 
continuing strong growth. 

Our leading-edge platform 

Our comprehensive suite of fully 
integrated software products is 
designed to deliver the best possible 
experience for users. 

Our software solutions are underpinned 
by our state-of-the-art CiA platform. 
The platform provides the core 
functionality, security and a consistent 
user interface for each of our products, 
and enables our customers to access 
their information anywhere, at any 
time and from any device. We continue 

to evolve our platform, ensuring our 
customers can easily adapt to changes 
in mobile devices, computing and user 
preferences. 

challenges, legislation and emerging 
trends. This deep industry engagement 
ensures our preconfigured solutions 
continue to lead the market. 

Deepest functionality for 
the markets we serve

We have chosen to focus on six key 
markets: local government, government, 
education, health and community 
services, asset- and project-intensive 
industries, and corporates and financial 
services. With more than 30 years’ 
experience and over 1,200 large-scale 
enterprise customers, we possess 
an expansive understanding of these 
sectors and provide the deepest 
functionality for the markets we serve. 
We continue to add more functionality 
to our products and preconfigured 
solutions for these markets, to 
streamline implementation and reduce 
customers’ time, cost and risk. 

Preconfigured solutions 

TechnologyOne’s integrated products 
form the building blocks from which 
our preconfigured, industry-specific 
solutions are developed. 

Created in collaboration with hundreds 
of customers, the solutions cover 80 
per cent of each sector’s requirements. 
This accelerates implementation, while 
leaving room for the software to be 
configured to customers’ specific needs. 

This approach is faster, cheaper 
and safer than that adopted by our 
competitors. 

Deep industry engagement 

Each of our preconfigured solutions 
is developed by a team of specialists 
with an in-depth understanding of our 
key markets. We work closely with 
our sectors to stay abreast of current 
requirements, organisational and user 

The Power of One 

TechnologyOne’s hallmark is being 
one vendor with a single vision, code-
line and experience. We do not use 
implementation partners or value-
added resellers. We take complete 
responsibility for building, marketing, 
selling, implementing, supporting and 
running our enterprise solutions for 
each customer to guarantee long-term 
success. 

Our unique value proposition 

We are 100% accountable to our 
customers, whether the focus is on 
business needs, underlying technology, 
delivering implementations on time and 
within budget, or excellence in support 
and customer service. 

When organisations invest in our 
solutions they benefit from a direct 
relationship with us every step of the 
way. From the start, we take ownership 
of a project and provide outstanding 
service and support. 

Unlike our competitors, we provide a 
single, integrated consulting capability 
to enable a safer, faster and more 
cost-effective time to delivery for our 
industry solutions. We partner with our 
customers to ensure that they can truly 
unlock the value of their TechnologyOne 
investment. This is underpinned by the 
industry and product experience of our 
300 consultants and the power of our 
Solutions Implementation Methodology 
(SIM) 2.0. 

The power of evolution 

Substantial investment into R&D each 
year allows us to provide our customers 

a strong, continuing competitive 
advantage through an enterprise 
solution that adapts and evolves by 
embracing new technologies, concepts 
and innovation. 

In our 30+ years, being ahead of the 
technological curve has been part of 
our DNA, because we’ve invested in 
technology, processes and people, 
for our customers and the verticals we 
serve. We’re always innovating, so our 
customers can too. 

Using technology for competitive 
advantage 

One of our founding principles in 
1987 was to use new and emerging 
technologies to provide a competitive 
advantage for our customers. It 
continues to be a major focus today. 

For more than 30 years, we have 
successfully delivered a continuous 
and smooth technology transition that 
has seen TechnologyOne migrate 
our customers across a number of 
technology paradigms, from mainframe 
to client-server computing to the 
Internet, to our Connected Intelligence 
(Ci) platform and more recently, Ci 
Anywhere. Our SaaS solution is built 
on beautiful design, and can be used 
by any business consumer, anywhere, 
on any device and at any time. It is 
powerful and simple to use, allowing 
our customers to realise the benefits of 
our global SaaS ERP solution on their 
smart mobile devices. 

Simplicity,   
not 
complexity

As a leader in the ERP market, we have always focused 
on transforming business. More importantly, we do this to 
remove complexity and make life simple for our customers. 

Simplicity is a philosophy we continue to embrace in 
everything we do for our customers. We want to be known 
for an ERP solution that is easy, simple and intuitive to use, 
and that removes needless complexity. 

By embracing the simplicity of a SaaS model, we deliver 
our software in a high performing and secure manner. 
Our highly available infrastructure has redundancy built 
in at every level and ensures our customers don’t have to 
worry about running or updating their own software and 
infrastructure. 

By removing the need to manage their computing 
environment, customers can focus on business, rather than 
the supporting technology. 

33

Transforming business, making life simpleOur StrategyOur 
growth

35

Transforming business, making life simpleOur GrowthGlobal SaaS ERP Solution

Our ongoing success has been 
underpinned by the incredible growth 
of our SaaS business, which doubles in 
size every 18 months. This is powering 
the growth of TechnologyOne, which 
continues to double in size every five 
years. 

We now have 637 customers on our 
global SaaS ERP solution. 

Our solution is a clear market leader 
because we are the only enterprise 
vendor to offer a true SaaS ERP solution 
across the entire enterprise. 

Unlike many other software providers 
that use cloud hosting, we own, 
build and support our software. 
Because other providers handcraft 
each customer’s environment, they 
cannot offer similar shared benefits or 
economies of scale. 

$500m+ ARR by FY26

TechnologyOne is focused and we are 
clearly on track to achieve our strategic 
goal of reaching $500 million+ Annual 
Recurring Revenue (ARR) by 2026. 

To achieve this, we are focused on a 
number of platforms for growth:

1. 

Driving the growth of our customer 

base

2. 

Expanding within our vertical 

markets

3. 

Expanding our product range and 

depth

4.  Growth in the UK, and beyond

We see the UK as a significant growth 
area, demonstrated by the increased 
success we have seen in that region 
over the last five years.  

1. Driving the growth of 
our customer base

As an established company with 
34 years of success, we benefit 
from the investment of more than 
1,200+ customers. We draw on these 
relationships and deep industry 
knowledge to power our success and 
bring new customers to TechnologyOne. 

quickly meet our customers’ needs. 
There is significant runway for us to 
expand our customer base across all 
markets and grow our solution footprint 
as we add value for customers. 

This growth is supported by the vertical 
alignment of our Marketing, Sales, 
Product and Consulting teams, and 
is a testament to the deep industry 
knowledge and expertise that we have 
developed in-house across these fields. 

2. Expanding within our 
vertical markets

We have experienced continued 
success and expansion within each of 
our vertical markets. The adoption of 
our global SaaS ERP has also enabled 
us to further penetrate our key vertical 
markets more deeply. 

Driving adoption of our global SaaS 
ERP  

TechnologyOne has made the transition 
to our SaaS solution simple and 
seamless for our on-premise customers. 
They can move to SaaS in weeks, not 
years, like those using our competitors’ 
products. 

By transitioning to SaaS, our on-premise 
customers will unlock the significant 
benefits that our SaaS customers 
already receive. 

During the year we announced the end 
of our on-premise business by October 
2024. This watershed milestone gives 
our remaining on-premise customers 
ample time to make the transition to our 
global SaaS ERP solution. 

We expect 90%+ of all our remaining 
on-premise customers to move to our 
SaaS solution, driving the growth of our 
SaaS business. 

Increasing adoption of our products 

Our global SaaS ERP solution comprises 
15 products (with the recent acquisition 
of Scientia) and up to 30 modules 
per product, delivering the deepest 
functionality for the markets we serve. 
Our solutions are modular by design, 
providing customers with the flexibility 
to add new products as their needs 
increase. 

We focus and specialise on six large 
vertical markets, which enables us to 
build deep industry knowledge and 
develop preconfigured solutions that 

We’re constantly enhancing the 
functionality of our products and 
delivering new innovations, for the 
benefit of our customers. This has 

been key to our 99 per cent customer 
retention and our continued growth over 
the last 34 years. 

Our focus for existing customers is to 
increase our product footprint, to ensure 
customers are benefiting from the full 
depth and breadth of our solution. 

3. Expanding our product 
range and depth

We work closely with our customers 
to ensure we understand their needs, 
meet their priorities, drive continuous 
improvement and provide an increasing 
range of functions within our enterprise 
solutions. Our goal is to build proven 
practices into our solutions and deliver 
the best software and services available 
for our customers. The result is that we 
continue to extend our product offering 
by developing additional features and 
functions – further building on what 
is already one of the world’s most 
comprehensive enterprise software 
suites. 

By re-engineering all our products for 
Ci Anywhere, customers can enjoy the 
same software functionality across any 
device, anywhere, any time. 

Through DXP, we are extending the 
reach of our software from the back-
office power users such as accountants, 
payroll clerks, student administration 
and customer service teams, to the front 
office end users such as employees, 
ratepayers and students; making the 
power of ERP available to everyone. 

Our Sales, Marketing and Customer 
Success teams keep customers 
informed about recent developments 
and the experiences of fellow 
TechnologyOne customers. This 
helps customers further improve 
their technology systems, business 
processes and models. 

Building on this partnership approach, 
the TechnologyOne Customer 
Community has transformed our support 
experience. 

As a dynamic group of TechnologyOne 
experts and customers, the Customer 
Community provides a world-class 
support experience to customers. It 
also enables them to influence product 
direction, keep up-to-date with industry 
news and collaborate with other 
customers. 

4. Growth in the UK, and 
beyond

We see the UK as a significant growth 
area, demonstrated by the increased 
success we have seen in that region 
over the last five years. 

In FY21, we built on our breakeven 
status, with SaaS ARR of $9m, up 20%. 

Our team have been working on 
the localisation of our global SaaS 
ERP solution, to ensure that we are 
delivering a solution that fits the 
specific needs and requirements of our 
industries in the UK. 

This year, we achieved a major 
milestone, completing the localisation 
of our Student Management product, 
which opens up significant opportunities 
for growth in Higher Education. 

We also made our first international 
acquisition in leading Higher Education 
software provider Scientia, adding 
a world-class enterprise scheduling 
and timetabling product to our 
OneEducation SaaS ERP solution. 

This acquisition supports our 
strategic focus to deliver the deepest 
functionality for Higher Education, and 
accelerate our growth and competitive 
position in the UK. 

We have global locations across 
Australia, the United Kingdom (UK) and 
New Zealand, the South Pacific and 
Asia. 

We have adapted our business to meet 
the differing needs of customers in 
each of these regions. In particular, we 
adapt our sales strategies for different 
regions as we identify new and ongoing 
customer needs. 

Soon we will explore opportunities in 
new geographies, including the US. 

Deepest 
functionality 
for the 
markets  
we serve

A deep understanding and engagement with 
our key markets means we can deliver to our 
customers integrated, preconfigured solutions 
that provide proven practice, streamline 
implementations and reduce time, cost and risk.

37

Transforming business, making life simpleOur GrowthOur
operations

39

Transforming business, making life simpleOur OperationsStuart 
MacDonald

Chief Operating Officer

leading software, by always being 
on the latest release, with the latest 
features and functionality.

Aligning our people 
behind our strategy

With the right strategy in place, we know 
that the alignment of our people behind 
it is the key to our continued success. 

With this in mind, we brought all our 
people together for our inaugural 
Company Kick Off (CKO). 

Throughout the three-day tribal event, 
we shared our team and product 
strategies, immersing our people in 
our path forward and ensuring they 
were engaged, focused and enabled to 
deliver on their role in our future growth.

This was a critical part of the 
enablement of our strategy, ensuring 
that our people are aligned behind our 
common goal. 

The UK had a strong year, with our 
value proposition now clearly defined 
and the team executing on this in our 
two industries of Local Government and 
Higher Education. The acquisition of 
Scientia bolstered the strength of our 
Higher Education solution for both the 
UK and our wider APAC market. 

We see the UK as a significant platform 
for future growth over the next few 
years, with a total addressable market of 
three times our APAC market. 

Driving a national agenda

This year we commissioned research 
by IBRS and Insight Economics into the 
economic potential of SaaS, uncovering 
a game-changing $252 billion over 
the next 10 years, as the direct benefit 
potential of our key industries moving 
to SaaS. 

Not only has this endorsed our SaaS-
first strategy, but it has given us the 
platform to drive the conversation 
across all levels of government and 
business, and put TechnologyOne in the 
vanguard of the digital revolution. This 
level of influence and engagement with 
key industry players will underpin our 
success.

We set out this year with aspirational 
plans and expectations. It is a testament 
to our Power of One and cohesive 
strategies that we delivered on those 
aspirations.

FY21 saw the realisation of two years 
of hard work focusing on top-down 
strategies and organisational alignment 
across the business. Each part of the 
organisation not only delivered on its 
goal, but most importantly, worked 
together to deliver collective success. 

We achieved record ARR of $257.5m as 
SaaS powers our growth, and this can 
be best seen in our key industries of 
Local Government and Education, which 
experienced strong results. 

Our success validates that the team is 
executing on an impressive strategy.

We continued to drive our strategy 
forward by announcing a watershed 
moment in our SaaS journey, committing 
to moving all remaining on-premise 
customers to SaaS by 2024. We are 
also laser focused on migrating our 
customers to our next generation ERP, 
Ci Anywhere.

We know that Ci Anywhere, delivered 
via SaaS, is our future, and together they 
will enable a significant era of growth, 
by allowing us to focus our resources on 
a single platform and delivery method to 
drive innovation forward. It will mean all 
customers can experience our industry 

41

Transforming business, making life simpleOur OperationsPaul 
Jobbins

Chief Financial Officer and Executive Vice 

President, Corporate Services

Stuart 
MacDonald

(Acting) Executive Vice President,  

United Kingdom

Underpinning innovation 
and growth

In FY22, the Corporate Services team 
will continue to support the business to 
deliver innovations that will underpin 
growth in sales to new and existing 
customers, while driving improvements 
in internal systems and processes. 

By partnering with the business, we will 
assist in the transition of customers to 
our SaaS platform, the adoption of more 
TechnologyOne products, and support 
winning new customers in the UK and 
APAC.

The Corporate Services team supports 
the company through strategic business 
partnering and by providing systems 
and processes that drive efficiency, and 
by managing our capital and cost base 
to ensure we optimise return on our 
investments. 

In FY21, we focused on strengthening 
our resources, skills and systems to 
ensure we can support the business to 
achieve future growth and scalability as 
a SaaS company. We are well structured 
to provide detailed forecasts, planning 
and analysis to support sensible 
business decisions and win new 
business. 

Supporting strategic 
success

In FY21 we delivered record Annual 
Recurring Revenue (ARR) growth of 
$257.5m, and are on track to deliver 
our goal of $500 million ARR by 
FY26. This has been supported by the 
implementation of our new revenue 
processing system.

The Corporate Services team also 
supported an increased focus on the UK 
business, delivering additional finance 
and legal business support to assist in 
achieving a Profit Before Tax of $1.6m 
in FY21. 

People 

We believe strongly in a culture 
of collaboration, and in providing 
environments for our team members 
to come together and have in-person 
‘collisions’ that spark innovation. To 
support this, the Corporate Services 
team led the negotiation and fit-out of 
new leases in Adelaide and Canberra, 
and a number of office lease extensions 
in other regions.

We also worked hard to ensure we 
have the right remuneration framework 
in place to support a high performing 
culture. This has been validated by 
another strong year of growth, record 
profits and successful customer 
outcomes. 

The UK had another strong year, 
achieving Profit Before Tax of $1.6m, 
with our value proposition now clearly 
defined and the team executing on 
this in our two industries of Local 
Government and Higher Education.

We achieved a huge milestone this year 
in the completion of the regionalisation 
of our Student Management software for 
the UK. This will significantly enhance 
our OneEducation global SaaS ERP 
offering for the UK, enabling universities 
to manage the entire student lifecycle 
from a single solution. 

With Higher Education firmly in the 
spotlight, we appointed two new senior 
education advisors:  Professor John 
Latham CBE, Vice-Chancellor and CEO 
of the Coventry University Group and 
Dr Katie Bell, Chief Marketing Officer 
of UCAS, the UK’s Universities and 
Colleges Admissions Service. The 

addition of the non-executive advisory 
roles are key to our UK higher education 
strategy. 

Continuing momentum in 
FY22

We rounded out the year with our first 
international acquisition in leading 
higher education software provider 
Scientia, adding a world-leading 
enterprise scheduling and timetabling 
product to our OneEducation solution.

The acquisition supports our strategic 
focus to deliver the deepest functionality 
for Higher Education by bolstering 
the strength of OneEducation, and 
accelerates our growth and competitive 
positioning in the UK. The integration 
of our two global companies will deliver 
an enhanced and differentiated digital 
experience for our customers, making 
us the only ERP provider in the world 
to offer this solution to the higher 
education market, as part of a full 
enterprise suite. 

As we lean into FY22, we have 
appointed industry heavyweight Leo 
Hanna as our new Executive Vice 
President, UK, to drive the continued 
growth and success of the UK region. 

Leo draws on more than 20 years’ 
experience building and leading sales, 
marketing and professional services 
organisations in some of the world’s 
leading technology and SaaS firms, 
including Oracle, Symantec and 
Microsoft Corporation.

Leo’s focus for the coming year will 
be on continuing our momentum in 
Higher Education, while spearheading 
expansion in Local Government.

43

Transforming business, making life simpleOur OperationsBen 
Malpass

Executive Vice President, Sales

FY21 was a hugely successful year for 
the Sales team, who leveraged their 
relationships to drive new opportunities 
across our key industries.

This was spearheaded by our 
customers’ digital transformations, as 
they partnered with us to leverage a 
future-proof ERP solution that empowers 
them to be agile in adapting to a 
changing business landscape. This has 
been demonstrated by our ability to 
transition an additional 100 customers to 
our SaaS Platform this year.

Our announcement to move all 
customers to SaaS by 2024, coupled 
with our research that uncovered a 
$252 billion benefit potential of all 
our key industries moving to SaaS has 
resonated strongly with customers. We 
see these continuing to have a positive 
impact on the value we provide into 
FY22.

The acquisition of Scientia has also 
provided us with an opportunity to 
expand on the offerings we can deliver 
our customers, and drive significant 
growth in the UK.

Aligning behind our 
strategy

Our Sales team is aligned behind a 
strategy of enhancing, retaining and 
acquiring customers, which enables 
us to improve engagement across the 
business and enhance our customer 
experience and interactions. 

Our industry sales team focused on 
aligning our product capabilities to 
the needs of our industries, which 
resulted in customers increasing their 
investment in our enterprise capabilities. 
SaaS transition initiatives also saw 
opportunities for our Sales teams to 
work with our customers and identify 
additional value for products and 
modules, which continued to increase 
our average product penetration.

We worked closely with our Product 
General Managers and Product Success 
Directors to provide feedback that has 
enhanced the value our customers 
derive from our solutions, resulting in 
strong customer retention. FY21 also 
saw greater alignment with Consulting, 
to ensure we unlocked the value of our 
Power of One promise for customers.

We welcomed approximately 40 new 
customers to the TechnologyOne family 
in FY21 and our new customer average 
deal size increased by a factor of 2.5x 
through the year. This demonstrated 
the success of our industry-focused 
solutions strategy and dominance in our 
key markets of Local Government and 
Education. Key wins included:

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

Charles Darwin University

Endeavour College

NSW Ombudsman

Charles Sturt University

Cross River Rail Delivery Authority

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

Parliamentary Services NZ

Cancer Council QLD

Credit Union SA

Hesta, West Yorkshire Combined 
Authority

Fareham Borough Council

Allerdale Borough Council

St Giles Society

Advent Care

The success we’ve experienced this 
year demonstrates that we have a 
strong strategy in place, and the team is 
now focused on executing in APAC and 
extending that success to the UK. Our 
industry-focused Sales teams, our global 
SaaS ERP offering and Ci Anywhere 
platform, and our ability to deliver value 
quickly continues to differentiate us in 
the market. 

I am extremely proud of what our entire 
sales team have achieved in a disruptive 
and uncertain FY21. Our continued 
investment in career frameworks, sales 
development and the opportunity we 
have created for our teams to progress 
- from our sales graduates to senior 
management - has seen a significant 
amount of internal promotions and 
resulted in continued success. 

David 
Cope

(Acting) Executive Vice President,  

Consulting

In FY21, we completed the first phase of 
our Consulting transformation agenda, 
which was focused on setting our 
foundations and building our platform 
for future growth. 

We’ve now moved into phase two, 
which involves improving alignment 
across the business to ensure that we 
are tapping into that deep market focus 
and commitment that differentiates us 
from competitors. 

Driving our recurring 
revenue 

Phase two of our transformation agenda 
will also see us focus on improving 
the value we offer to customers, and 
driving customer intimacy through the 
expansion of our Application Managed 
Services (AMS) program. 

Recurring revenue in our AMS program 
grew once again, jumping 42% in FY21 
to $19M+. We also maintained our strong 
97 per cent customer satisfaction rate, 
which spoke to the continued high 

engagement of our customer group. 

Importantly, we have focused on 
ensuring we have the right people 
and resourcing in place to provide 
customers with a compelling customer 
experience. We hired more than 70 
new consultants in FY21, and facilitated 
the transfer of 16 people to other areas 
of the business, furthering the career 
growth of our team members and depth 
of skills across the company. 

Our Career Frameworks are now fully 
operational, which has supported an 
all-time high of 23 consultants being 
identified as promotion ready across 
the Consulting group. We once again 
delivered a record 3,350 days of 
training, and are investing in improving 
the speed of onboarding of our people. 

Streamlining delivery and 
driving growth 

The learnings we gained from COVID-19 
have strengthened our Consulting 
business significantly, and we have 

now moved to a completely remote 
delivery model. Our Consulting team is 
fully equipped to deliver all customer 
go lives remotely, with on-site activities 
happening by exception. 

This has allowed us to improve 
the way we resource our customer 
engagements, and ensure that we 
have the right people on the right 
projects. This has also enabled us to 
move towards a product and vertical 
alignment model, rather than a regional 
model – which allows our customers to 
benefit from the deep vertical expertise 
of our people. 

This has driven continued success 
across our Consulting business, with 
profit and margin increases across the 
board, together with exponential growth 
in the UK. 

The Consulting success in the UK has 
underpinned UK overall profitability, 
and ensured we are set up to support 
continued UK expansion and growth. 

45

Transforming business, making life simpleOur Operations 
Richard 
Nicol

Executive Vice President, Products

Daniel 
Sultana

Executive Vice President, SaaS Platform

Our Products team is committed to 
delivering products our customers love, 
and our people are proud to create. We 
live and breathe this mantra, and it is 
critical to delivering on our Transforming 
Business, Making Life Simple promise. 

To underpin this strategy, we have 
been laser focused over the last twelve 
months on migrating our customers to 
our next generation ERP, Ci Anywhere. 

Ci Anywhere will lay the foundation 
for the next 10 years of our evolution 
and is the basis for some incredible 
innovations – innovations that will 
show our customers just how powerful 
it is working with a vendor who takes 
complete responsibility for their 
enterprise solution. To us, Ci Anywhere 
is more than just software - it is our 
platform for the future, the product 
our customers will love to use, and the 
stepping-stone for our success. 

Scientia acquisition 
introduces new product

Our acquisition of Scientia has 
expanded our product suite and R&D 
capability, adding a world-leading 
enterprise scheduling and timetabling 
product to our OneEducation ERP SaaS 
solution. 

Our development teams are now 
working on integrating Scientia’s 
Syllabus Plus product into our single 
global code line, which will deliver 
a seamless experience across the 
entire TechnologyOne enterprise suite 
of products. This opens up exciting 
new opportunities for the future, 
by enhancing the strength of our 
OneEducation offering for the Higher 
Education market. 

Underpinning UK growth

We have been investing in the 
requirements of the UK, through the 
establishment of a local UK R&D team 
that has been tasked with fast-tracking 
the localisation of our products for 
the region. The team reached a key 
milestone this year, with the completion 
of the localisation of our Student 
Management solution, creating a 
significant future revenue stream for the 
UK. We see this team expanding as they 
continue localisation across our other 
products. 

The growth of our SaaS business 
has continued to soar this year, and 
it is underpinned by the strength and 
security of our SaaS Platform, which 
provides a compelling value proposition 
for our customers.

Our strong investment and 
determination to be the most trusted 
SaaS Platform has again ensured we 
are global leaders in compliance, cyber 
security, performance and reliability. 

To efficiently and easily meet the many 
global compliance standards our SaaS 
Platform adheres to, we have built 
an innovative process and technical 
production line that allows us to achieve 
and maintain compliance with all our 
security accreditations. 

In FY21, we sought to register this 
innovative process and technical 
production line for a patent. We plan to 
use this patent to provide our learnings 
to customers, and provide them with 
compliance automation to assist them in 
meeting their reporting obligations. 

Enhancing cyber security 
standards

Our watershed moment 
as a SaaS company

Over the year, we continued to expand 
the security and compliance posture of 
our platform to reaffirm our position as 
the most trusted SaaS provider. 

One of the key security accreditations 
that sets our solution apart is our 
IRAP PROTECTED status, enabling 
us to process and store government 
information up to PROTECTED. We 
offer this for all Australian Federal 
Government customers at no additional 
cost.

In FY21, we extended the benefits of 
IRAP PROTECTED beyond our federal 
government customers, to deliver the 
enhanced cyber security benefits to our 
entire global customer base. 

This year we also completed the 
relocation of our UK customer’s data 
from the European Union to the 
United Kingdom to comply with Brexit 
initiatives. This also included an uplift in 
security, compliance, performance and 
reliability at no additional costs to our 
customers. 

In 2021 we announced a watershed 
moment, by committing to moving all 
remaining on-premise customers to 
our SaaS Platform by 2024. With 637 
customers already on our SaaS Platform 
- an increase of 18 per cent since last 
year – we are now at a tipping point, 
with the majority of our customers 
already on SaaS. 

It’s a credit to the strength of our SaaS 
Platform, and the speed and ease of 
transitions for on-premise customers 
switching to SaaS, that we were able to 
make this significant business decision. 

We’ve committed additional resources, 
focus and support to ensure that we 
can help our remaining on-premise 
customers make this transition over the 
next three years, and enjoy the benefits 
of our full global SaaS ERP value 
proposition.

47

Transforming business, making life simpleOur OperationsMaree 
Gallagher

Executive Vice President, People & Culture

Brett
Hooker

Executive Vice President, New Engineering

This year, our people and business 
recovered from the disruption caused by 
COVID-19, and we have put a spotlight 
on ensuring that our return to a ‘new 
normal’ encompasses flexibility, without 
compromising our collaborative culture. 

company-led flexible working and in-
person collaboration has allowed us to 
maintain productivity, drive creativity and 
honour of our Power of One philosophy, 
which is contingent on cross-team 
engagement.

This included the establishment of a 
company-led remote working policy, 
which encourages our people to be in 
the office three days per week, with the 
remaining two days to be worked either 
remotely or in-office, at the preference 
of our team members.

We also invested in our office spaces 
across the board, signing new leases 
and extending many across our regions, 
to ensure that we provide our people 
with an environment that is conducive 
to collaboration, learning and in-person 
collisions that spark innovation – with 
the understanding that many of these 
happen in hallway conversations.

We also invested in tribal events that 
provided our people with an opportunity 
to reconnect and enjoy each other’s 
company. One of the key highlights 
was our Company Kick Off event, which 
provided an opportunity for all team 
members to align behind our company 
strategy and vision for the future, as 
well as celebrate their achievements 
together. 

We have found this combination of 

Investing in our people

Our people are our greatest competitive 
advantage, and we continued to 
value this through investment in 
their engagement, career paths and 
capabilities. 

In what has been a buoyant candidate 
market over the last 12 months, we have 
focused on recruiting high performers 
that will contribute to the success 
of our company strategy and have 
a positive impact on our culture. We 
also cemented Talent and Succession 
Frameworks, helping us to identify our 
critical talent and critical roles, develop 
our highest potential team members and 
invest in our future leaders.

Diversity and inclusion has remained a 
key priority across our talent pipeline. 
As well as ensuring that we have a 
diverse workforce, we have committed 
to addressing the shortage of female 
technology workers in Australia, through 
partnerships with advocacy groups 
such as Women in Digital and Women 
in Technology. In doing so, we play a 
leading role in growing a more diverse 

pipeline of future candidates to work in 
technical fields and at TechnologyOne.

Finally, we supported a number of 
organisational changes across the 
business, to ensure we have the right 
people and structure in place to drive 
forward key strategic milestones – 
including our move to a full SaaS 
business, the migration of our customers 
to our next generation ERP, Ci 
Anywhere, and setting up the UK for its 
next phase of growth. 

Career Framework 

After successfully piloting our Career 
Framework in Consulting last year, we 
rolled this out more broadly across 
the business in FY21, engaging team 
members at all levels of the business 
on their career paths to ensure they are 
clear on what’s required to progress, be 
it laterally, cross-functionally or through 
promotion.

Team member advocacy 

Our eNPS survey measures team 
member advocacy and loyalty. 
Enhancements to the data captured and 
action planning post-survey have been 
received positively by team members, 
and are allowing us to use this data 
to drive decisions and improvements 
across the business.

Our New Engineering department 
focuses on driving new product 
innovations, without being inhibited by 
the day-to-day operational requirements 
of our existing product roadmaps. 
This enables the team to explore new 
innovations, separate to the delivery and 
ongoing enhancement of our existing 
product suite. 

With a focus on technology innovation 
that allows us to reach out to a whole 
new class of users, New Engineering 
is driving future revenue opportunities 
within our key markets.

These innovations are underpinned by 
two key innovative practices. Firstly, we 
are investing more in design experts, 

which allows us to tap into human 
computer interface research and 
thinking. These experts are focused on 
ensuring our software is personalised to 
the scenario a user is trying to complete, 
and simplify their experience. 

To complement this process, we are 
also engaging with end users and 
those managing the software very 
early in the design and innovation 
process. This allows us to incorporate 
customer feedback ahead of go-live, 
increasing the success and quality of 
the end products coming out of New 
Engineering. It also helps us to ensure 
we’re building technology that is fit for 
purpose, customer-driven and meets 
our customers’ needs. 

New product innovations

We continued the development of our 
second generation of Digital Experience 
Platform (DXP) products in FY21. Our 
first customer, City of Canning, went live 
with our Local Government DXP, which 
provides an engaging digital experience 
for council communities.

We also ramped up engineering of 
our Student DXP, completing our user 
engagement and design phases, 
and moving into technical research. 
FY22 will see us commence the 
manufacturing stage for Student DXP.

49

Transforming business, making life simpleOur OperationsBrock 
Douglas

Executive Vice President, Scientia

On September 15, TechnologyOne 
completed our acquisition of Scientia 
and its subsidiaries, and have now 
commenced operational ownership of 
the company. 

per cent of institutions in Australia, and 
50 per cent in the UK now supported 
by our solution. The announcement 
was well received by our university 
customers.

Scientia marked TechnologyOne’s first 
international acquisition, and adds a 
world-leading enterprise scheduling 
and timetabling product to our 
OneEducation ERP SaaS solution. This 
acquisition supports our strategic focus 
to deliver the deepest functionality for 
higher education, and accelerate our 
growth and competitive positioning. 

As part of the acquisition, 
TechnologyOne welcomed over 100 
new Scientia team members from 
across the globe, and immediately 
immersed them into our TechnologyOne 
experience and DNA, through a number 
of onboarding initiatives, company-
wide events, and direct access to our 
TechnologyOne executive team.

It solidifies TechnologyOne’s dominance 
in the Higher Education market, with 75 

Whilst continuing to enhance the 
Scientia products, our development 

teams are now also working to integrate 
Scientia’s products into our single global 
code line. 

Once complete, customers will enjoy 
a single user interface and experience 
across the entire TechnologyOne 
enterprise suite of products. 

Ultimately, the integration of our two 
global companies creates a great 
opportunity. It will deliver an enhanced 
and differentiated digital experience 
for our customers, making us the only 
ERP provider in the world to offer this 
solution to the higher education market, 
as part of a full enterprise suite.

Technology“

Being able to fully integrate a schedule 
into the full student experience is 
very important, and an exciting step 
for those universities - like Swinburne 
- that use TechnologyOne’s student 
management system.” Michelle 
Gillespie, Registrar and Director of 
Student Administration and Library 
Services at Swinburne University of 

“

The power  
of one

One vision. One vendor. One code-line. One experience.

We do not use implementation partners or value-added 
resellers. We take complete responsibility for building, 
marketing, selling, implementation and supporting our 
enterprise solution for each customer to guarantee  
long-term success. 

51

Transforming business, making life simpleOur OperationsOur 
people

53

Transforming business, making life simpleOur PeopleThe power  
of evolution

Substantial investment into R&D each year means we provide 
our customers a strong, continuing competitive advantage 
through an enterprise solution that adapts and evolves by 
embracing new technologies, concepts and innovation.

Culture, 
collaboration 
and alignment  

At TechnologyOne, we believe in a culture of innovation, creativity and collaboration and have created an environment that 
allows our people to thrive. This culture is built into the fabric of our business, driving high performance and underpinning our 
success. 

Over the last two years, we have focused our operating model and business to be a true SaaS business, and pivot away from 
an on-premise operating model. In a time when COVID-19 has accelerated this shift to digital, we have had the technology and 
organisational structure in place to provide stability for our people and our customers, despite the uncertainty otherwise driven 
by the pandemic. 

Employer of choice

Our people are a crucial source of 
our competitive advantage, and we 
purposefully invest in initiatives that 
support the recruitment, retention, 
development and progression of 
individual talent within our workforce. 

As a nationally recognised Employer of 
Choice, TechnologyOne is committed 
to providing an environment in which 
our talented people can be innovative, 
creative and realise their full potential. 

This year, TechnologyOne received 
more than 6,500 recruitment 
applications. 

We also value the voices of our 
team members to help shape our 
organisation. Our Employee Net 
Promoter Score (eNPS) surveys provide 
a channel for our people to be heard, 
with the results used to influence 
ongoing enhancements to our initiatives 
and programs. 

Extensive onboarding 
and training

TechnologyOne hires passionate, 
talented and innovative people who are 
inspired to think about the future. 

Our comprehensive onboarding 
program provides the best possible 
start for our people in their careers 
at TechnologyOne. We continue to 
support our commitment to developing 
our people and growing their careers 
by delivering training in leadership, 
technical and professional skills 
development. 

This year, we also welcomed 110 
new team members who joined 

TechnologyOne as a result of our 
acquisition of Scientia. Our market-
leading orientation and onboarding 
experience enabled us to seamlessly 
welcome our newest team members to 
the TechnologyOne family. 

To support this, we have continued to 
invest in our physical offices, this year 
opening new offices in Adelaide and 
Canberra, and signing a number of 
lease extensions on our offices in other 
regions. 

Cultivating a culture of 
innovation 

The innovation and creativity of our 
team is key to our success. 

With a team of more than 400 
developers, TechnologyOne runs 
one of the largest Australian-owned 
R&D centres for enterprise software. 
In addition to our R&D centres in 
Brisbane and Perth, we have offshore 
R&D centres in Indonesia and Vietnam, 
allowing us to extend our capability 
and better support our customers and 
existing products. 

Our developers are leaders in their field 
who challenge conventional thinking 
and go beyond the traditional realms of 
development methodology. Our state-
of-the-art R&D centre and initiatives 
are designed to foster collaboration, 
creativity and innovations that provide 
the platform for our future growth. 

Collaborative facilities and technology

To support new ways of working and 
adapt to the impacts of COVID-19, 
we have seen an increase in remote 
working among our team members 
over the last few years. As we begin to 
emerge from the pandemic, our focus 
has been on ensuring we can maintain 
that flexibility, and also provide an 
environment conducive to learning, 
collaboration and in-person collisions 
that spark innovation, which is at the 
heart of our culture.  

Our spaces are designed to foster 
creativity and teamwork, with our Hack 
Spaces providing a project area for 
aspiring team members, graduates and 
employees to innovate and develop 
world-class software. 

With technology and design being at 
the forefront of the concept, the Village 
Green social areas provide spaces in 
our offices to showcase the ongoing 
accomplishments and achievements 
of the company in an environment that 
reflects our products and values. 

This combination of company-led 
flexible working and in-person 
collaboration has allowed us to maintain 
productivity, drive creativity and honour 
of our Power of One philosophy, 
which is contingent on cross-team 
engagement. 

People initiatives to drive employee 
engagement 

In FY21, we invested significantly 
in employee initiatives that would 
drive reconnection, collaboration and 
teamwork, recognising that an extended 
period of remote working had resulted 
in many team members missing the 
dynamic team environment. 

Our cornerstone event was our 
Company Kick Off, which was a 
two-day event that brought all team 
members across the globe together 
– both virtually and in person, where 
possible – to align behind our company 

55

Transforming business, making life simpleOur Peoplestrategy and vision for the future. You can 
read more about our Company Kick Off 
event on page 59. 

To continue the momentum of Company 
Kick Off, we introduced One Talks, a 
monthly event held on the rooftop of our 
HQ building and streamed live. One Talks 
featured a different speaker each month, 
designed to keep our team up-to-date on 
the latest news from across the company, 
from the people doing the work on the 
ground. 

We also introduced Surprise and Delights, 
an initiative aimed at ensuring consistent 
company and leader-led team activities 
that would drive team reconnection and 
build excitement around returning to the 
office. The Surprise and Delight ‘menu’ of 
activities featured team lunches, themed 
Friday drinks, random acts of kindness and 
hosted events. 

In addition to these new initiatives, we 
continued our investment in existing 
employee engagement and recognition 
initiatives, including Hack Days, MARVELs, 
Town Halls and Regional Days. 

Hack Days provide employees the 
opportunity to collaborate across functional 
teams and work on projects that fall outside 
their normal day-to-day work. These Hack 
Days are key to driving our culture of 
innovation and creativity. 

This year, we extended our Hack Day to be 
a two-day event, which allowed us to better 
engage with team members across the 
globe, given the various time zones. 

Meanwhile, our MARVEL awards celebrate 
team members who go above and beyond 
and showcases ordinary people, doing 
extraordinary things. They are designed to 
recognise and reward top talent, as part of 
our achievement-oriented culture. 

MARVEL stands for Merit, Achievement, 
Recognition, Values, Excellence and 
Leadership. Categories for the MARVEL 
awards are centred around our key 
initiatives. These include:  

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

Leader of the Year

Compelling Customer Experience of 
the Year

Hack of the Year

Rookie of the Year

TechnologyOne Superheroes

Winners of the MARVELs receive company-
wide recognition, and are inducted into 
TechnologyOne’s League of Extraordinary 
People. 

Our quarterly Town Hall meetings provided 
employees with the chance to hear from 
our CEO and other TechnologyOne 
executives about company direction and 
strategy, as well as ask questions directly 
that are answered in real time. These were 
complemented by our Regional Days for 
Sales and Consulting, where these teams 
discuss strategy and goals, allowing 
them to strengthen relationships across 
regions, teams and projects, and improve 
engagement across the whole organisation. 

Graduate 
program  

Our graduate and intern programs form 
the foundation of our talent pipeline 
into the future. Our graduate brand and 
experience is highly regarded by our peers, 
competitors and industry bodies alike. We 
received in excess of 1,000 applications, 
highlighting the competitive and highly 
sought-after nature of our program. 

Our award-winning graduate program runs 
across our Software, Sales and Consulting 
teams. Our newest graduates work across 
TechnologyOne with the company’s most 
influential and skilled leaders, who provide 
them with valuable learning opportunities 
and experience. 

57

Transforming business, making life simpleOur PeopleIn 2021, we held a Company Kick Off 
(CKO) event for our entire team to 
come together and align behind our 
strategy for the future. 

This two-day event provided a unique 
opportunity for team members to 
understand the future direction 
of our business, explore the huge 
possibilities for delivering innovative 
solutions for our customers, and 
immerse themselves in the path to 
TechnologyOne’s future. 

Held in May, the tribal event was 
also hugely successful in reuniting 
all Australian team members after an 
extended period of COVID lockdowns 
and remote working, and allowing them 
to come together as a team, rather than 
individual contributors. 

For overseas team members unable 
to travel to Australia due to COVID 
restrictions, we provided a highly 
interactive online experience that 
enabled them to remain involved and 
engaged in the event. 

This initiative has driven our team 
members to unite behind a common 
goal, and ensure they understand 
their role in driving the success of our 
company strategy moving forward. 

59

Transforming business, making life simpleOur PeopleIndustry 
partnerships

We are committed to actively fostering 
a diverse and vibrant information and 
communications technology (ICT) 
industry. We want to create interest 
around this exciting time in Australia’s 
economy and ensure we are engaging 

early with Australia’s youngest and 
brightest minds in science, technology, 
engineering and maths (STEM) subjects. 

With a focus on diversity and building 
exceptional female talent pipelines, 

TechnologyOne partners with Women 
in Technology and Women in Digital to 
continue to build our brand recognition 
and employee value proposition 
to attract rising female stars to 
TechnologyOne. 

Equal 
opportunity  

TechnologyOne takes diversity and 
inclusion seriously. We advocate for 
equal opportunity for all are committed 
to addressing the shortage of female 
technology professionals in Australia. 
To help achieve this, we provide equal 
pay opportunities for men and women 
and have a zero-tolerance policy for 
discrimination and harassment of any 
kind. 

Recruitment and promotion within 
TechnologyOne are based only 
on the relevant skills, experience, 

qualifications, aspirations, potential and 
aptitude of applicants. 

to work in technical fields and at 
TechnologyOne. 

Some key programs TechnologyOne 
supported this year included the 
Women in Digital and the Queensland 
Women in Technology Awards. 

Women make up 36.5 per cent of 
TechnologyOne’s workforce, which is 
high compared to other technology 
and software companies globally. 
However, we are committed to further 
increasing the representation of women 
by working with strategic partners to 
encourage more women to pursue 
STEM-based careers. In doing so, we 
play a leading role in growing a more 
diverse pipeline of future candidates 

61

Transforming business, making life simpleOur PeopleWellness 
programs

TechnologyOne has a wellness program 
aimed at encouraging our team 
members to look after their wellbeing. 
We have evolved this program in 
recent years to provide team members 
impacted by COVID-19 lockdowns and 
restrictions with creative alternative 
options, such as a Wellness app, online 

yoga and strength building sessions so 
they can keep active in the comfort of 
their own home. 

Our wellness resource hub provides 
weekly wellness tips, support, videos 
and material aligned to our overall 
wellness model – Healthy Minds, 

Healthy Bodies, Healthy Spaces and 
Healthy Culture. 

This year we also did telephone 
wellbeing checks in regions affected 
by extended lockdown periods, and 
delivered wellness giftboxes to our 
team members in the UK. 

Our Corporate 
Sustainability scheme 

TechnologyOne is committed to 
managing our business operations 
in an environmentally responsible 
manner. Our headquarters in Brisbane’s 
Fortitude Valley has a Six Green Star 
environmental rating. The building 
includes numerous environmentally-
rated sustainable development 
features, including 50 per cent more 
fresh air than standard commercial 
buildings, carbon dioxide monitoring, 
external views to maximise daylight, 
energy-efficient lighting, dedicated 
exhausts in photocopier areas, a 
gas-powered generator and a large 

rainwater collection area on the roof to 
supply water for the toilets and garden 
irrigation. 

We have achieved Climate Active 
Carbon Neutral certification, and 
offset our carbon footprint through the 
acquisition of certified carbon credits, 
which have been created through a 
wind power initiative in India that aims 
to develop enough power to replace 
existing coal-fired power plants. This 
makes TechnologyOne one of only two 
companies in the Australian technology 
sector to make this investment and 
reach this achievement. 

Our people are also encouraged to 
access and adhere to our Environment 
Policy. It outlines our commitment 
to providing an environmentally 
responsible workplace, and ways to 
engage in sound workplace practices 
through reducing waste and giving 
more consideration to the use of energy 
and resources. 

For more information see our 
Corporate Sustainability Report 
overview on page 65.

63

Transforming business, making life simpleOur PeopleCorporate 
Sustainability 
overview

TechnologyOne’s  
approach to  
sustainability

Customer retention99 %

• 

• 

Customer satisfaction and retention

Data privacy and security

• 

Talent attraction and retention

•  Workplace diversity and inclusion

Employee engagement and culture

Employee training and development

Employee health and wellbeing

Ethics, values and transparency

Innovation

Compliance

36.5 %

Participation of women, placing  

us among the best globally in the 

IT industry

0

Total number of people who reported 

issues concerning Modern Slavery 

during FY21

PLEDGE

1%

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

• 

Our customers

Our people

Responsible 
business

Our community 
& environment

e

1% ti m

Our people

R&D

F

e

e

d

b
a
c
k
m
e
c
h
a

nis
m
s

Our community 
& environment

Our products 
and solutions

Implementation 
& Support

Marketing/Sales

1

%

p

r

o

fi

t

Our customers

Profit

Revenue

$2m global impact in FY21

Community investment and education

Environmental footprint

Our growth

For the full Sustainability Report visit our website TechnologyOneCorp.com

65

Transforming business, making life simpleOur People 
 
Our goal is to lift 

500,000 

children out of poverty

67

Transforming business, making life simpleOur PeopleTechnologyOne 
Foundation

The TechnologyOne Foundation is dedicated to making a 
difference to disadvantaged children and families in our 
communities by empowering them to transform their lives 
and create their own pathways to success. The Foundation 
was established in 2016 to ensure that charitable giving 
would become a long-term initiative for the business, and 
encourage philanthropy to become part of the company 
culture. Our Foundation helps great Australians achieve great 
things and we are committed to long term contributions to 
our key partners. 

The Pledge 1%

The TechnologyOne Foundation is part of the Pledge 1% 
corporate philanthropy movement, which is dedicated to 
making the community a key stakeholder in every business. 
In committing to the Pledge 1% movement, individuals and 
companies donate 1% of their profit, product and employee’s 
time to their communities. 

TechnologyOne donates 1% of annual profit to our charity 
partners, supporting our vision of changing the future 
by empowering disadvantaged children and families to 
transform their lives. This strategic approach to charitable 
giving enables us to make a bigger difference to the causes 
we support. 

Through the 1% product, our commitment is to donate 1% 
of new Annual Recurring Revenue each year. This makes it 
easier for not-for-profit organisations to access our solutions 
and take advantage of the efficiencies they provide, which in 
turn extends the impact of their work. 

All TechnologyOne team members can also take up to 
2.5 days leave each year to volunteer during work hours 
for charitable organisations. This supports our 1% of time 
commitment. The Pledge 1% equated to a more than $2 
million commitment by the company in FY21. 

Our contributions have helped children access education 
right across the globe - from refugee children right here in 
Brisbane to students in Tanzania. We are proud of the impact 
we make through our long-term commitments to charitable 
organisations, helping families escape the cycle of poverty.

The year in 
summary

$640,000  
donated to our charity 
partners

Welcomed  
KidsCan & St James 
Bursary Fund 
partnerships

$204,000  
worth of product 
discounts to NFPs

3795 hours  
of volunteering, 
equating to  
474 days

$20,000  
supporting 
disadvantaged youth 
impacted by COVID-19

27  
charities supported 
worldwide

900  
Solar Buddies built in 
record time

69

Transforming business, making life simpleOur PeopleCONTRIBUTIONCOMMUNITYWINNEr 2021Our key 
charity 
partners

Designs, delivers and scales innovative 
financial solutions that help families 
living in extreme poverty build 
sustainable livelihoods and access 
quality education for their children. 

Providing a free, high-quality education 
to children in poverty and with social 
pressures in Tanzania to complete 
their schooling. 

Treats, trains and equips the local 
communities to expand the reach 
of eye care services, ensuring the 
poorest and most marginalised groups, 
including children, can access free or 
low-cost care. 

Providing a broad range and far-
reaching social services to diverse 
people experiencing hardship or 
injustice, including youth support, 
accommodation services, addiction 
recovery, emergency relief and 
financial counselling. 

Uniting a global community to gift six 
million solar lights to children living in 
energy poverty by 2030, to help them 
to study after dusk and improve their 
education outcomes. 

Helping disadvantaged Australians to 
get the most out of their education to 
create better futures for themselves. 

Bursary Endowment Fund - Providing 
an extensive tertiary education 
pathway to an array of cultural, socio-
economic, and academic backgrounds. 

How we’re 
making a 
difference 
over time

54,159 children and families  
in partnership with 
Opportunity International Australia

5,193 lights  
in partnership with SolarBuddy

1,960 children through education, 
rehabilitation & energy housing 
in partnership with The Salvation Army

1800 youth are on pathways out  
of poverty  
in partnership with The School of St Jude

54,934 children through screening, 
glasses & eye surgery 
in partnership with The Fred Hollows Foundation

131 young lives are directly 
impacted helping them break the 
cycle of poverty.  
in partnership with The Smith Family

Provided food, clothing 
and health products for 25 
disadvantaged Kiwi pre-schoolers 
in partnership with KidsCan 

Our work with Opportunity 
International Australia

Through our donations to and partnership 
with the microfinance group Opportunity 
International Australia, we are transforming 
communities and helping families. We aim to 
lift 500,000 children and their families over a 
15-year period. 

As a result of this partnership, families in India 
can access small loans to enable them to 
build businesses. This will also help them to 
earn regular incomes to support themselves, 
as well as feed, clothe and educate their 
children. 

With funds for initiatives such as starting 
a shop or buying seeds for a vegetable 
farm, families can transform their lives and 
their children’s futures. Further, because 98 
per cent of the small loans are repaid and 
recycled, the impact creates a positive ripple 
effect in their communities as more jobs are 
created. Those jobs might include delivering 
goods or helping with sewing and weaving 
orders. 

Boosting local communities  

With more income and therefore more money 
to spend on items such as food and transport, 
families who used to live in poverty become 
active participants in their local economies. 
This benefits the providers of those products 
and services, who are themselves often 
entrepreneurs. 

This virtuous cycle ensures that microfinance 
provides a long-term boost to economies and 
helps to develop self-sustaining communities 
more so than one-time handouts. 

Creating change  

Micro-entrepreneurs are also able to use 
their influence to bring about positive 
changes in their communities. With the 
confidence that comes with having their own 
businesses, people can begin to seek better 
infrastructure or educational facilities from 
government, or bring local families together 
to take on community projects. 

Our support to date, with the benefit of 
leverage and recycling of funds, has helped 
54,159 children and their families to free 
themselves from poverty. 

Opportunity believes that every person has 
the right to reach their potential. Just like 
us, people living in poverty have dreams 
and hopes. But while talent is universal, 
opportunity is not. 

Our giving to Opportunity is changing that 
equation. 

71

Transforming business, making life simpleOur PeopleFinancial 
statements

73

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statementsDirectors’ 
report

Your Directors present their report on the consolidated entity (referred to hereafter as the Company) consisting of  
Technology One Limited and the entities it controlled at the end of, or during, the year ended 30 September 2021.

The following persons were Directors of Technology One Limited during the financial year and up to the date of this report:

Adrian  
Di Marco

B Sc, MAICD, FACS  |  Appointed 8 December 1999

He was inducted into the Pearcey Hall  
of Fame in 2015.

He remains a major shareholder  

of TechnologyOne.

Special Responsibilities

Board Chair and Chief Strategy and 
Innovation Officer. 

Interests in shares and options

17,372,500 ordinary shares in Technology 
One Limited held beneficially through 
Masterbah Pty Ltd. 6,000 ordinary shares in 
Technology One Limited held on behalf of 
family members. In addition, a relationship 
deed exists between Masterbah Pty Ltd and 
JL Mactaggart Holdings Pty Ltd (founding 
shareholders) – Masterbah Pty Ltd exercises 
voting rights only in respect of 26,872,500 
securities and an escrow arrangement 
applies to 14,000,000 of those securities.  
There are no other beneficial rights 
incumbent on these shares other than  
voting rights.

Experience and expertise

Mr Di Marco founded TechnologyOne 
in 1987, to build ERP software based on 
new and emerging technologies, that was 
configurable and did not require software 
customisation. Mr Di Marco has over 40 
years’ experience in the software industry. 
He was CEO of TechnologyOne up until 2017.

Mr Di Marco has played a major role in 
promoting Australian IT, and is a past Director 
of the Australian Information Industry 
Association, the industry’s peak body. He has 
been a director of numerous IT companies. 

Mr Di Marco is a supporter of Venture Capital 
and has invested in 30+ early stage tech 
companies in Australia and overseas.

He has been actively involved in charitable 
organisations, and is a past Director of the 
Royal Children’s Hospital Foundation Board. 
He established TechnologyOne foundation 
in 2015.

Mr Di Marco has received recognition for 
his contribution to IT including the Pearcey 
Award for pioneering achievement, the Tony 
Benson award for outstanding contribution 
to IT and the Australian Computer Society 
award in recognition of distinguished 
contribution to ICT. 

Pat  
O'Sullivan

CA, MAICD 
Appointed 2 March 2021

Experience and expertise

Mr O’Sullivan is a Chartered Accountant and 
has worked across a wide range of industries 
both as an executive and non-executive 
director. His last executive role was the Chief 
Operating Officer and Finance Director of 
Nine Entertainment Co Pty Limited, a position 
he held from February 2006 until June 2012 
and prior to that he was the Chief Financial 
Officer of Optus for five years.

He is currently Chairman of carsales.com 
and SiteMinder and Deputy Chair of Calvary 
Health. He is chairman of the Audit and Risk 
Committees at Calvary Health and he is 
also a member of their Remuneration and 
Nomination Committees. His previous ASX 
non-executive director roles include iiNet, 

Richard  
Anstey

FAICD, FAIM  |  Appointed 2 December 2005

Experience and expertise

Mr Anstey's career has spanned over 40 
years. His first company, Tangent Group 
Pty Ltd, established a strong reputation for 
the development of software products and 
strategic management consultancy for the 
banking and finance sector.

With the sale of Tangent, he then co-founded 
lnQbator/iQFunds in 2000, an early stage 
investment group focussed upon the 
technology, telecommunications and life 
sciences sectors.

Through iQFunds and personally, Rick has 
co-invested in more than 30 companies with 
the support of Commonwealth Government 
programs, Venture Capital Funds and 
both corporate and personal investors. 
While being an active Non-Executive 
Director of his investments, Richard has 
added value wherever appropriate to 
maximise shareholder value and has also 
been actively involved in the trade sale of 

iSelect, APN Outdoor, iSentia, Marley Spoon 
and Afterpay.

Mr O'Sullivan is a member of The Institute 
of Chartered Accountants in Ireland and 
Australia.

He is a graduate of the Harvard Business 
School’s Advanced Management Program.

Special responsibilities

Board Deputy Chair & Lead Independent 
Director and member of Audit & Risk 
Committee

Interests in shares and options

15,509 ordinary shares held in Technology 
One Limited.

seven companies to organisations in the 
US, Europe and Australia. Mr Anstey is a 
Board member of Queensland University of 
Technology-Entrepreneurship (a university-
wide initiative with global collaborations, 
turning ideas into reality), a Fellow of the 
Australian Institute of Company Directors 
and a Fellow of the Australian Institute of 
Management. Mr Anstey now continues 
his career in venture capital and corporate 
advisory roles as a founder of iQ360 Pty Ltd.

Special responsibilities

Chair of the Nomination and Governance 
Committee.

Interests in shares and options

30,000 ordinary shares in Technology One 
Limited held beneficially through the Anstey  
super fund.

75

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
Jane  
Andrews

GAICD PhD  
Appointed 22 February 2016

Experience and expertise

Special responsibilities

Chair of the Remuneration Committee, 
member of Audit and Risk Committee and 
Nomination and Governance Committee. 

Interests in shares and options

30,600 ordinary shares held in  
Technology One Limited. 

Dr Jane Andrews joined the Board in 2016, 
bringing more than 15 years leadership 
experience in research and innovation-based 
organisations.

As a founder and investor in numerous 
innovative companies, Dr Andrews has 
extensive experience in corporate strategy, 
entrepreneurship, commercialisation, 
innovation, research and development.

Dr Andrews is a Graduate of the Australian 
Institute of Company Directors, holds a PhD 
in Life Sciences, a Bachelor of Science (First 
Class Honours) and a Graduate Diploma in 
Applied Finance and Investment.

John  
Mactaggart

FAICD  
Appointed 8 December 1999

Experience and expertise 

Interests in shares and options

26,872,500 ordinary shares in Technology 
One Limited held beneficially through 
JL Mactaggart Holdings Pty Ltd. 30,000 
ordinary shares in Technology One Limited 
held via the Jontra trust.

Mr Mactaggart’s experience spans industries 
such as agriculture, agri-tech, manufacturing 
and software. He co-founded the Australian 
Association of Angel Investors Limited, is 
a co-founder of Brisbane Angels and was 
the Australian representative of the World 
Business Angels Association. Mr Mactaggart 
played an integral role in the creation, 
funding, and development of TechnologyOne 
and remains a major shareholder. Mr 
Mactaggart has been a Fellow of the 
Australian Institute of Company Directors 
since 1991.

Sharon  
Doyle

B Laws (Hons), B IT (Dist), G Dip Bus Admin, 
GAICD  |  Appointed 28 February 2018

Experience and expertise

Ms Doyle is the Executive Chair and 
majority owner of corporate advisory firm, 
InterFinancial Corporate Finance Limited. 
She has successfully navigated technology 
companies through the challenges of 
steep global growth curves, with a strong 
understanding of the dynamics in Software 
as a Service (SaaS).

Ms Doyle’s leadership of InterFinancial has 
seen her develop a core practice providing 
strategic advice for technology and other 
IP-rich, high-growth companies. She also has 
extensive international experience managing 
merger, acquisition and private equity 
processes across the technology industry.

Ms Doyle was previously Vice President at 

Clifford  
Rosenberg

B Bus Sc (Hons), MSc (Hons)   
Appointed 27 February 2019

Experience and expertise

Mr Rosenberg has more than 20 years’ 
experience leading change and innovation 
in technology and media companies. As 
the former Managing Director of LinkedIn 
for Australia, NZ and South-East Asia, Mr. 
Rosenberg started the Australian office 
in 2009 and oversaw the expansion of 
LinkedIn in Australia from 1 million members 
in 2009 to more than 8 million members in 
2017. Previously, he was Managing Director 
at Yahoo! Australia and New Zealand, and 
prior to that role he was the founder and 
Managing Director of iTouch Australia NZ 
where he grew the Australian office to one 
of the largest mobile content and application 
providers in Australia.

Mr Rosenberg has more than seven years’ 
experience on the boards of publicly listed 
companies. His directorships include 
Nearmap (ASX: NEA), A2B Australia Limited 

Mincom, one of Australia’s most successful 
enterprise software companies. Ms Doyle is 
a Non-Executive Director at Auto & General. 
She holds a Bachelor of Laws (Hons) 
and Bachelor of Information Technology 
(Dist.) from the Queensland University of 
Technology, as well as a Graduate Diploma of 
Business Administration from the University 
of Queensland. She is a qualified member of 
the Australian Institute of Company Directors.

Special responsibilities

Member of the Audit and Risk Committee 
and Nomination and Governance Committee.

Interests in shares and options

18,280 ordinary shares in Technology  
One Limited.

(ASX: A2B) and Bidcorp (JSE: BID). Cliff was 
also a Non-Executive Director with Dimmi 
(online reservations company bought by 
Tripadvisor.com in May 2015). He holds a 
Bachelor of Business Science (Hons) from 
the University of Cape Town and a Masters 
of Science (Hons) from the Universitat Ben 
Gurion Ba-Negev.

Special responsibilities

Member of Remuneration Committee

Interests in shares and options

27,533 ordinary shares held in Technology 
One Limited held beneficially through Clifro 
Pty Ltd ATF Cliffro Trust.

77

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statementsCompany 
Secretaries

Stephen  
Kennedy

B Bus, FGIA, JP (Qual) 
Appointed 13 April 2017

Mr Kennedy was appointed Company Secretary on 13 April 2017 
and has been employed with TechnologyOne since January 2017.

Paul  
Jobbins

B Bus (ACA), CA, GDipAppFin, MAppFin, GAICD   
Appointed 16 December 2019

Mr Jobbins is the TechnologyOne Chief Financial Officer and EVP - 
Corporate Services and was appointed as Company Secretary on 16 
December 2019.

Mr McLean retired from this role at 
TechnologyOne on 15 July 2004 and remains 
a Non-Executive Director.

Special responsibilities

Member of the Remuneration Committee.

Interests in shares and options

69,737 ordinary shares in Technology One 
Limited held beneficially through RONMAC 
Investments Pty Ltd.

Ron  
McLean

Appointed 8 December 1999

Experience and expertise 

Mr McLean has more than 40 years’ 
experience in the enterprise software 
industry including holding Senior Executive 
and Managing Director roles in several 
international and Australian software 
companies.

His involvement in the enterprise software 
industry has included leading and managing 
software development, consulting and sales 
and marketing teams.

Mr McLean joined the Board as a Non-
Executive Director in 1992, was appointed 
as the General Manager in 1994, Chief 
Operating Officer in 1999 and was promoted 
to Chief Executive Officer of Operations in 
2003.

Peter 
Ball

B Bus, CA   
Appointed 2 March 2020

Experience and expertise

Mr Ball is a Chartered Accountant who has 
enjoyed a long career in the professional 
services sector spanning nearly 40 
years, initially in audit both nationally 
and internationally, with the last 30 years 
in management consulting. Peter was a 
Partner with KPMG for some 25 years 
providing a range of professional services 
and advice to both public and private sector 
organisations.  He has also held senior 
roles with KPMG including the national 
leader of KPMG's Strategic Planning and 
Economic Development service line and 
more recently as national partner responsible 
for the finance and operations for KPMG's 
Government Advisory Practice.

Most of Peter's work involves providing 
strategic, economic, commercial and 
business improvement advice to enable 
organisations to make fully informed 
business decisions.

During his management consulting career 
Peter has worked across a number of 
industries including tourism and leisure, 
gaming and wagering, arts and sports, and 
state and local governments. 

Peter has an entrepreneurial spirit and has 
been involved with a number of start-ups 
across a range of sectors including property, 
education, gaming and the pharmaceutical 
sector. He is also actively involved in the 
community/not for profit sector having been 
a Director of Alzheimer's Queensland for the 
past 10 years.

Special responsibilities

Chair of the Audit & Risk Committee.

Interests in shares and options

21,900 ordinary shares held in Technology 
One Limited held beneficially through the 
Noosa Hill Super Fund.

79

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statementsMeetings of Directors
The numbers of meetings of the Company's Board of Directors and 
of each Board Committee held during the year ended 30 September 
2021, and the numbers of meetings attended by each Director were:

Full meetings 
of Directors 
(Board)

Meetings of committees

Audit

Nomination

Remuneration

A Di Marco

R McLean

J Mactaggart

K Blinco

R Anstey

J Andrews

S Doyle

C Rosenberg

P Ball

P O’Sullivan

11

11

10(11)

-

-

-

5(5)

4(4)

10(11)

11

11

11

11

-

6

6

-

6

6(6)

1(1)

-

-

-

-

4

4

4

-

-

-

-

3

-

-

-

3

-

3

-

-

Where a Director did not attend all meetings of the Board or relevant 
committee, the number of meetings for which the Director was eligible 
to attend is shown in brackets. In sections where there is a dash, the 
Director was not a member of that committee.

Principal activities
The principal activity of Technology One Limited (the Company) 
during the financial year was the development, marketing, sales, 
implementation and support of fully integrated enterprise business 
software solutions, including:

 • TechnologyOne Enterprise Asset Management

 • TechnologyOne Financials

 • TechnologyOne Human Resource and Payroll

 • TechnologyOne Enterprise Budgeting

 • TechnologyOne Supply Chain

 • TechnologyOne Property and Rating

 • TechnologyOne Student Management

 • TechnologyOne Business Intelligence

 • TechnologyOne Enterprise Content Management

 • TechnologyOne Performance Planning

 • TechnologyOne Spatial

 • TechnologyOne Enterprise Cash Receipting

 • TechnologyOne Stakeholder Management

 • TechnologyOne Business Process Management

 • TechnologyOne Timetabling and Scheduling (Syllabus Plus)

Dividends
Dividends paid to members during the financial year were  
as follows:

Ordinary shares

Final dividend for the year ended 30 September 2020 of 
9.41 Cents (2019 - 8.78 Cents) per fully paid share paid in 
December 2020 (2019 - December 2019)

60% franked (2019 - 75%) based on tax paid at 30%

Interim dividend for the year ended 30 September 2021 of 
3.82 Cents (2020 - 3.47 Cents) per fully paid share paid in 
June 2021 (2020 - June 2020)

60% franked (2020 - 60%) based on tax paid at 30%

2021 
 $’000

2020 
$’000

30,225

27,930

12,279

11,058

Non-audit services
Non-audit services provided by the Company’s auditor, Ernst & Young, 
in the current financial period and prior financial year included taxation 
advice and other advisory services. The Directors are satisfied that the 
provision of non-audit services is compatible with the general standard 
of independence for auditors imposed by the Corporations Act.

During the year, the following fees were paid or payable for non-
audit services provided by the auditor of the Company and its related 
practices:

Climate Governance

TechnologyOne’s broader focus on environmental, social  
and governance factors (ESG) is overseen by the Nomination  
& Governance Committee. The responsibility for implementing ESG 
sits with each Business Division, facilitated by our Group Company 
Secretary and Head of Compliance and Risk.

TechnologyOne’s Board of Directors will ensure that  
climate-related risks are incorporated into the Company’s strategy  
and risk management framework. 

Ernst and Young:

2021 
$

2020 
$

Total dividends paid

42,504

38,988

Taxation advice and other advisory services

170,131

148,290

Review of operations
Please refer to Letter to Shareholders on page 15.

Significant changes in the state of 
affairs
There were no significant changes in the Company's state of affairs 
during the financial year.

Matters subsequent to the end  
of the financial year
On 23 November 2021, the Directors of Technology One Limited 
declared a final dividend on ordinary shares in respect of the 2021 
financial year. The total amount of the dividend is $32,454,363 and is 
60% franked.

No other matter or circumstance has occurred subsequent to period 
end that has significantly affected, or may significantly affect, the 
operations of the Company, the results of those operations or the 
state of affairs of the Company or economic entity in subsequent 
financial years.

Likely developments
Please refer to Letter to Shareholders on page 15.

Indemnification and Insurance  
of Officers
Insurance and indemnity arrangements concerning officers of the 
Company were renewed or continued during the year ended 30 
September 2021.

An indemnity agreement is in place between TechnologyOne and 
each of the Directors of the Company named earlier in this report and 
with each full-time Executive officer and secretary of the Company. 
Under the agreement, the Company has indemnified those officers 
against any claim or for any expenses or costs which may arise as a 
result of work performed in their respective capacities.

TechnologyOne paid an insurance premium in respect of a contract 
insuring each of the Directors of the Company named earlier in 
this report and each full-time Executive officer and secretary of the 
Company, against all liabilities and expenses arising as a result of  
work performed in their respective capacities, to the extent  
permitted by law.

Total remuneration

170,131

148,290

Auditor’s independence declaration
A copy of the auditor's independence declaration as required under 
section 307C of the Corporations Act 2001 is set out on page 147.

Rounding of amounts
The Company is of a kind referred to in Instrument 2016/191, issued 
by the Australian Securities and Investments Commission, relating 
to the 'rounding off' of amounts in the Directors' report and financial 
report. Amounts in the Directors' report and financial report have 
been rounded off in accordance with that Class Order to the nearest 
thousand dollars, or in certain cases, to the nearest dollar.

Environmental regulation
TechnologyOne has assessed the recommendations of the Task Force 
on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD). The outcome of the 
assessment is discussed in the section below.

TechnologyOne’s Climate change position

While the TechnologyOne operations do not have a material impact 
on the environment, we acknowledge that it is the changing attitude of 
many that will have a material impact on reducing climate change.

Climate change is both an environmental and economic issue. 
TechnologyOne accept the science of climate change and are 
committed to contributing to the decarbonisation of the Australian/
Global economy. Given the growing economic and social importance 
of the IT sector and its integral role in the decarbonisation of the 
economy, public disclosures on transition and climate-related risks 
and opportunities are fundamental. We acknowledge climate change 
as a risk that may impact our operational and financial performance. 
Therefore, TechnologyOne seeks to fulfil the recommendations of  
the TCFD.

To support our first TCFD disclosure, we’ve completed a high-level 
review of our practices and the current alignment of disclosures with 
the TCFD recommendations. Our approach included benchmarking, 
using high level risk assessment and management review and 
identification of potential climate-related risks and opportunities. 

We understand, as we begin our journey to better assess and 
integrate climate-related risk that this is a dynamic process, requiring 
evolution and iteration. This initial, high level review has identified a 
range of opportunities to further develop and strengthen our approach 
to climate change risks in future going forward.

Climate Strategy

To further understand the impact that climate change could have on 
our business we performed a high-level qualitative assessment of 
the impact of 2°C and 4°C global warming scenarios on our current 
business model.

Under the 2°C scenario our key risks include reputational and legal 
risks associated with a lack of climate risk disclosure, as well as 
financial risks due to energy use and carbon pricing.

Under the 4°C scenario key aspects of the risks relate to physical 
damage, network disruptions, missed sales opportunities and health 
impacts on our staff.

Climate Risk Management

We aim to ensure that our risk management process is dynamic and 
that the top climate change risks and emerging risks, as they evolve, 
are identified, managed, and incorporated into our existing risk 
management processes. 

TechnologyOne aims to develop actions and procedures that seek to 
prevent and reduce climate-related risks, notably our strategy aims to 
reduce our greenhouse gas emissions (GHG) and decarbonise  
our activities.

Our GHG decarbonisation strategy involves three phases: 

Phase 1: measure (understand the key emission sources) 

Phase 2: manage and minimise (reduce energy consumption and 
associated carbon emissions where practicable)

Phase 3: offset (all or a proportion of our carbon emissions)

Climate Metrics and targets

TechnologyOne conducted a greenhouse gas assessment in 
accordance with the GHG Protocol: A Corporate Accounting and 
Reporting Standard and Corporate Value Chain.

TechnologyOne’s total emissions for FY21 amounted to 5,513.3 tonnes 
of carbon dioxide equivalent, with Scope 3 emissions being the key 
contributor (87% of net GHG). 

Our carbon footprint from combined third-party services and utilities is 
a significant contribution to our overall emissions. 

We aim to use any arising opportunities to reduce our emissions (e.g. 
COVID-19 resulted in a significant advancement in video-conferencing 
making it possible to reduce our GHG emissions associate with 
air travel). TechnologyOne is proud to say it is carbon neutral for 
the second year running and has achieved an 18% reduction in 
greenhouse gas emissions. Refer to published Sustainability Report for 
further TCFD related information.

81

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statementsShare options

Unissued shares

As at the date of this report, there were 4,303,812 unissued ordinary 
shares under options (4,303,812 at the reporting date).  
Refer to note 33 for further details of the options outstanding.

Option holders do not have any right, by virtue of the option,  
to participate in any share issue of the company.

Shares issued on the exercise of options

During the year, employees and Executives have exercised options 
to acquire 2,268,446 fully paid ordinary shares in Technology One 
Limited at a weighted average exercise price of $4.67. Refer to note 
33 for further details of the options exercised during the year.

Corporate Governance Statement
The most recent Corporate Governance Statement can be located at 
the Group’s Website (www.technologyonecorp.com).

This report is made in accordance with a resolution of Directors.

Adrian Di Marco
Executive Chairman

Brisbane
23 November 2021

Remuneration Report (Audited) 
Introduction from the Chair of the Remuneration Committee

Dear Shareholders,

On behalf of TechnologyOne’s Remuneration Committee (the 
Committee), I am pleased to present our Remuneration Report for the 
year ended 30 September 2021. 

The intention of this report is to describe the linkage between our 
strategic initiatives, remuneration principles and remuneration 
framework and how these in turn, drive shareholder returns. 

The primary objective of the Committee is to ensure that we align 
Key Management Personnel (KMP) financial rewards with shareholder 
interests and our business strategy, whilst ensuring that we attract 
and retain exceptional Executives, Directors and Employees who are 
collectively responsible for delivering long-term profitable growth and 
sustainable shareholder returns. This report provides a:

 • Summary of incentive outcomes and alignment to  

Company performance 

 • Response to First Strike

Response to First Strike
At the AGM on 22nd of February 2021, whilst the majority of votes 
were cast in favour (61.7%) of the adoption of the 2020 Remuneration 
Report, there were 38.3% of votes cast against, constituting a ‘first 
strike’ under the Corporations Act 2001. 

Proxy adviser and shareholder feedback indicated this was as a result 
of the Board applying discretion to allow for full vesting of a portion 
of KMP LTI that related to FY20 performance. The Board exercised 
discretion for options tranches with a FY20 test, given exceptional 
performance of the KMP during previously unforeseen circumstances, 
(i.e. the global COVID pandemic). It is important to note the LTI 
targets were set before COVID, and were both unrealistic and unfair 
under these circumstances, and so the Board exercised discretion to 
rectify the situation. It should be noted the company delivered record 
revenue (up 4%), record profit (up 8%) and record SaaS ARR growth 
(up 32%) in FY20. It should also be noted this was the first time, in 33 
years, the Company had ever exercised Board discretion.

 • Remuneration framework changes during FY21

There has been no Board discretion exercised in FY21.

Summary of incentive outcomes 
and alignment to Company 
performance
This report demonstrates a clear alignment between executive 
remuneration and shareholder value creation. 

As COVID-19 continues the company delivered exceptional results  
as follows:

• SaaS ARR growth of 43%

• Consulting profit growth of 14%

• The UK achieving profit of $1.6m 

• Net profit after tax growth of 15%

In summary:

 • Total Executive KMP remuneration, grew by 12% year on year. This 
is below the Company’s 19% growth in net profit before tax (NPBT).

 • Fixed Remuneration for Executive KMP was not increased in FY21.

In FY21 we have also undertaken a detailed review of our Executive 
Remuneration Framework, in collaboration with an independent 
executive remuneration advisor, and engaged with shareholders and 
proxy advisors to understand and address any ongoing concerns. 

Changes in FY21
The review of our remuneration framework and remuneration report 
disclosures resulted in the following changes for FY21:

 • Improved readability of the Remuneration Report based on 

suggestions from proxy advisors and shareholders 

 • Clarifying that the Malus provision (previously disclosed as ‘claw 
back’) for the Deferred STI and LTI involves the Remuneration 
Committee considering whether or not the Executive KMP has 
upheld expectations (e.g, as per our code of conduct) and if there 
are any irregularities or unintended outcomes that would affect 
the vesting of an award. 

 • Short Term Incentive (STI) outcomes across our Executive KMP 

 • Clarifying that the Retention Bonus is actually an STI deferral 

was up 18% in line with growth in reported NPBT of 19%. STIs have 
been consistently calculated on Executive NPBT across FY20 
and FY21. Executive NPBT has always been the basis for STI 
calculation.

component. This is a long-term deferral to ensure alignment with 
expectations of shareholders and to encourage staff retention. It 
has been renamed to be Deferred STI and is disclosed separately 
throughout the Report. 

 • Deferred STI earned and deferred was up 18% in line with growth 

 • Disclosing progress against our mandatory shareholding 

in reported NPBT of 19%.

requirement for Non-Executive Directors.

 • Our Long-Term Incentive (LTI) plan resulted in 99% of ‘at risk’ 
LTI vesting for our Executive KMP. The Board set challenging 
LTI targets, which drive superior performance and long-term 
shareholder wealth creation.

 • The Board considered whether any discretion on incentive 
outcomes was warranted during FY21 and concluded that 
there was no reason to adjust remuneration outcomes as they 
aligned to shareholder experience and Board expectations of 
performance given market conditions. 

It is important to note KMP remuneration in FY20 was calculated on 
reported NPBT, rather than underlying NPBT, which is the same as 
FY21. When comparing growth in STI and Total Remuneration  
to growth of the results, reported NPBT should be used not  
underlying NPBT.

TechnologyOne remains focused on delivering its growth promises 
and we believe that our current remuneration structure positions us 
well to continue providing our shareholders with strong returns, both 
in the short and long-term, as well as ensuring alignment across our 
Executive KMP. We will continue to have ongoing dialogue with proxy 
advisors and our shareholders to evolve our framework as well as its 
presentation in the remuneration report. 

Jane Andrews 
Chair, Remuneration Committee

Brisbane 
23 November 2021

83

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
Remuneration Report (Audited) 

The remuneration report contains the following sections.

1.  About this report

2. Remuneration governance

3. Executive remuneration at TechnologyOne - strategy,  

principles, and target mix

4. How Executive remuneration is structured

5. Key questions

6. Relationship between remuneration and Company performance

7.  Detail of current year Executive remuneration and performance

8. Non-executive Director fees

9. Service agreements for the Executive KMP

Non-executive Directors

Status

Sharon Doyle

Independent Director

Audit and Risk Committee 

Full year

Nomination and Governance Committee

Clifford Rosenberg

Independent Director

Remuneration Committee

Peter Ball

Independent Director 

Audit and Risk Committee Chair

Pat O’ Sullivan

Deputy Chair and Lead Independent Director

Audit & Risk Committee

Kevin Blinco

Independent Director

Audit and Risk Committee

Full year

Full year

Appointed 2 
March 2021

Resigned 23 
February 2021

10. Detail of Executive remuneration for FY21

Executive Director

11.  Statutory Remuneration

12. Additional statutory disclosures 

1.  About this report

1.1 

Basis for preparation of FY21  
Remuneration Report

The information in this Remuneration Report has been prepared based 
on the requirements of the Corporations Act 2001 and applicable 
accounting standards.

The Remuneration Report is designed to provide shareholders with a 
clear and detailed understanding of TechnologyOne’s remuneration 
framework, and the link between our remuneration policies and 
Company performance.

The Remuneration Report details the remuneration framework for 
TechnologyOne’s Key Management Personnel (KMP). For the purpose 
of this report, KMP are defined as those persons having authority and 
responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the major activities 
of TechnologyOne, directly or indirectly, including any Director 
(whether Executive or otherwise). 

This report has been audited.

1.2 

People covered by the Remuneration Report

The Remuneration Report discloses the remuneration arrangements 
and outcomes for those individuals who we have determined to meet 
the definition of KMP under AASB 124 Related Party Disclosures. The 
below table summarises each KMP, their position and term as KMP. 

Non-executive Directors

Ron McLean

Independent Director

Remuneration Committee

John Mactaggart 

Non-independent Director

Major shareholder

Richard Anstey

Independent Director

Nomination and Governance Committee Chair

Dr Jane Andrews

Independent Director

Remuneration Committee Chair 

Audit and Risk Committee

Nomination and Governance Committee

Status

Full year

Full year

Full year

Full year

Adrian Di Marco

Executive Chair 

Chief Strategy and Innovation Officer

Full year

Major shareholder

Executive KMP

Edward Chung

Chief Executive Officer

Stuart MacDonald

Chief Operating Officer

Paul Jobbins

Chief Financial Officer

Full year

Full year

Full year

2. Remuneration governance 
The Remuneration Committee is responsible for developing the 
remuneration framework for TechnologyOne Executives and making 
recommendations related to remuneration to the Board. The 
Committee develops the remuneration philosophy and policies for 
Board approval.

The responsibilities of the Committee are outlined in their Charter, 
which is reviewed annually by the Board.

The key responsibilities of the Committee include:

 • Advising the Board on TechnologyOne’s policy for Executive and 

Director remuneration

 • Making recommendations to the Board on the remuneration 

arrangements for Executives and Directors to ensure they are 
aligned with TechnologyOne’s vision and are set competitively to 
the market

 • Approving KMP terms of employment

In making recommendations to the Board, the Committee reviews 
the appropriateness of the nature and amount of remuneration to 
Executives and Directors on an annual basis.  

Prior to the award or vesting of any deferred remuneration including 
deferred Short Term Incentives (STI) and Long Term Incentives (LTI), 
the Committee will consider whether there are any irregularities or 
other factors that would affect the payment or vesting of that award. 
This is a formal agenda item for the Remuneration Committee.

During the year the Committee engaged an external advisor to review 
the Remuneration Report. No remuneration recommendations as 
defined under the Corporations Act (2001) Sect 9B were provided.

Executive Remuneration at 
TechnologyOne- strategy, 
principles, and target mix

3.1 

Our remuneration strategy and principles

At TechnologyOne, our remuneration strategy is aligned with our 
vision of “transforming business, making life simple”. The Board 
believes that in order to deliver on our vision and build long-term 
shareholder growth, TechnologyOne must have a remuneration 
framework that allows it to compete for talent both locally and 
globally in a highly competitive and fast-moving environment and 
against companies such as Oracle, SAP and Workday, as well as other 
Australian software companies.

The remuneration principles that underpin our remuneration strategy 
and framework are: 

 • Attract, retain and motivate skilled Directors and Executives in 

leadership positions

 • Provide remuneration which is appropriate and competitive both 

internally and against comparable companies (our peers)

 • Align Executives’ financial rewards with shareholder interests and 

our business strategy

 • Achieve outstanding shareholder wealth creation

 • Articulate clearly to Executives the direct link between individual 

and group performance, and individual financial reward

 • Reward superior performance, while managing risks

 • Provide flexibility to meet changing needs and emerging 

competitive market practices

 • Commitment to diversity, reflecting a fair and equitable 

remuneration framework

 • Commitment to simplicity 

Our Executive remuneration framework aligns with common practices 
for ASX200 companies, with adaptations to meet the demands of 
the enterprise software market. Relative to our ASX-listed peers, our 
Executives receive:

 • Relatively low fixed remuneration to enable a greater emphasis  

on performance

 • Relatively large at-risk STI portion aligning Executives to current 

year performance

 • Deferred STI component to help further drive long-term 
shareholder wealth and ensure that we retain high  
performing Executives

 • LTI linked to long-term strategy, targets, and shareholder  

wealth creation

The winning of new business, driving continued profit growth in 
the current year is the key to our long-term success, and it is for 
this reason our STI as a percentage of the total remuneration is 
significantly higher than our ASX-listed peers. At the same time, the 
fixed remuneration for our Executives is comparatively low compared 
to our ASX-listed peers. The significant weighting towards the STI 
encourages our Executives to drive new business and financial 
performance in the current year, which creates Annual Recurring 
Revenue (ARR)1 for future years, and therefore long-term success and 
shareholder wealth.

TechnologyOne Executives are exposed to the long-term outcomes 
of the business through the Deferred STI and a larger LTI component 
than our ASX-listed peers.

The talent pool in Australia for Executives with large scale enterprise 
software companies is highly competitive. Therefore, it is important to 
ensure that our remuneration framework is appropriately structured 
for the enterprise software market. We believe that our remuneration 
structure offers the necessary flexibility and incentive to ensure that 
we attract and retain talented Executives who understand the industry 
and, in turn, drive shareholder value.

3.2 
The remuneration arrangements of our Executives are made up of both fixed and at-risk remuneration (STI and LTI), as follows:

Overview of remuneration framework

Fixed remuneration

Short-term incentive (STI)

Deferred Short-term incentive (STI)

Long-term incentive (LTI)

Nature

Base salary plus superannuation.

Defined as payments contingent on  
a one year performance period. 

An amount equal to 25% of the annual 
STI earned in the year is deferred 
(i.e. 20% of total STI) and paid at the 
conclusion of the two-year period 
following the end of the financial year.

Defined as payments contingent on 
performance over more than one year.

Options and performance rights are 
subject to meeting performance targets 
tested over three years

Form

Purpose

Cash

Cash

Cash

Equity

To provide a competitive salary based 
on market benchmarking from the 
Remuneration Committee

Drives outstanding performance in the 
short-term which in turn translates to 
long-term shareholder wealth. 

Deferral enables risk management 
via Malus Provision and encourages 
retention.

Creates a focus on long-term 
performance, with alignment to  
long-term shareholder wealth creation.

Performance 
targets

Performance 
period

N/A

N/A

Percentage of applicable Executive Net 
Profit Before Tax (NPBT) 

Percentage of STI awarded. 

Annual.

Deferred STI is accrued over a three-
year period- comprising the annual 
performance period in which it is 
determined and a deferral period of 
two years of service.

The Deferred STI component is subject 
to a Malus Provision in that there must 
be no irregularities or other factors that 
would affect the payment of that award.

• 

• 

Relative TSR (25%)

EPS growth (75%)

Three years.

The LTI component is subject to a Malus 
Provision in that there must be no 
irregularities or other factors that would 
affect the vesting of the award.

1ARR is not an IFRS measure and is unaudited, it represents future contracted annual revenue at year end. 

85

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
 
Target remuneration mix
Target remuneration mix at the beginning of the contract for the CEO (Table 1), and other Executive KMP (Table 3) is represented below, based 
on target STI achievement and maximum LTI achievement. Over time, the remuneration mix is expected to change due to a larger increase in STI 
relative to other remuneration components. The below represents the target contract remuneration mix for the CEO at the beginning of a contract 
(Table 1) and demonstrates how remuneration mix changes over time (Table 2).

4.  How Executive Remuneration is structured

4.1 

Fixed remuneration

Fixed remuneration comprises base salary and superannuation. Fixed remuneration was not increased for FY21.

Table 1. Target CEO remuneration mix  
(start of contract target)

Table 2. CEO remuneration mix  
FY21

4.2 

Short-term incentive

Executives participate in an STI plan which is based on Executive NPBT1. Key features of the STI plan are detailed in the table below:

33%

33%
33%

23%

33%
27%

Feature 

Opportunity

7%

27%

9%

41%

Description

The value of the STI is based on a percentage of applicable Executive Net Profit Before Tax1. The percentage is determined at the outset of the 
executive’s contract and remains fixed for the contract period for each Executive KMP. Refer to section 7.5 below for each Executive’s agreed 
percentage.

STI awarded is uncapped to encourage over-achievement, drive performance in the current year and the creation of long-term shareholder wealth. 
Given expected growth in NPBT over time, the longer the executive stays with TechnologyOne, the greater the weighting of the STI component of total 
remuneration in comparison to the fixed and LTI components, which typically only increase by CPI on an annual basis. An illustrative example of how 
this works over time in practice has been presented following this table. This effect encourages retention of outperformers by increasing their earning 
potential the longer they stay with the Company, which aligns them with shareholders

Fixed

STI-current

Deferred STI

LTI

Fixed

STI-current1

Deferred STI

LTI

Award vehicle

Cash

Performance measures

The STI is based on a percentage of applicable Executive Net Profit Before Tax1. This effectively aligns the target incentive with shareholder return since 
share price has trended with the increase in earnings. 

The below represents the target contracted remuneration mix for other Executive KMP at the beginning of a contract (Table 3) and demonstrates 
how remuneration mix changes over time (Table 4). 

Table 3. Target Executive KMP remuneration mix  
(start of contract target)

Table 4. Executive KMP remuneration mix FY21

33%

7%

33%

23%

30%

STI cap

8%

27%

39%

TechnologyOne’s use of STIs differs from most other organisations in that it utilises only one performance measure in determining STI awards.  
This is to create focus and clarity for Executives whilst also providing transparency for shareholders as to how STI awards are determined. The Board 
and Remuneration Committee continue to monitor STI performance measures so as to ensure that they best align with the Company’s commitment to 
providing shareholder wealth. 

As a SaaS company, NPBT is critical to driving long term shareholder wealth. This is because the winning of new business, drives NPBT growth in the 
current year. This winning of new business translates to growth in annual recurring revenue (ARR)2 in a SaaS company, which results in contracted 
returns for the business in the future. Therefore, although the KMP are rewarded in the short term for increases in profitability, the Company and 
shareholders continue to reap the benefits of that increase in profitability for the foreseeable future.  

An important element of the success of our STI has been that it is uncapped so the greater the results in the current financial year, the greater the STI. 
This not only encourages over performance in the current financial year for the Company it has a dramatic flow on effect in future years through the 
greater recurring revenues for the Company. The uncapped STI also helps retain Executives over the long-term because the more they succeed, the 
more financial incentive there is to stay with us and continue to work hard to achieve it each year, and the greater benefit to our shareholders through 
an ever-increasing recurring revenue base. Market value is contingent on high and sustained annual growth.

Likewise, if the Company under-performs (e.g. loss of customers) or the results in a year are lower (e.g. impairment), there is a significant financial 
impact to Executives as their STI forms a significant portion of their total remuneration. Just as the STI is uncapped on the upside, it is also uncapped 
on the downside. Given that the Executive’s fixed remuneration is significantly lower than our ASX-listed peers, under-performance has a significant, 
negative impact on their total remuneration. This ensures that Executive awards are aligned with shareholder returns. 

The STI framework aligns performance with remuneration outcomes encouraging over performance and penalising under performance.

Fixed

STI-current

Deferred STI

LTI

Fixed

STI-current1

Deferred STI

LTI

While the STI is the largest component of remuneration, Deferred STI encourages executives to have a sustainable long term mindset when 
approaching profit generation and when this component is summed with the LTI component, the long term elements of variable remuneration 
work well in conjunction with the short term elements. 

We have reported separately the remuneration mix for our Executive Chair (Table 5). The Executive Chair was offered an LTI of $400,000 which  
he declined as he has in previous years. The Remuneration Committee recognises that Mr Di Marco’s total remuneration is substantially below 
that of comparable companies. The Remuneration Committee acknowledges that Mr Di Marco’s significant shareholding in TechnologyOne 
provides the benefits that the LTI aims to achieve.

Table 5. Target Executive Chairman remuneration mix

Table 6. Executive Chairman remuneration mix FY21

33%

34%

0%

29%

33%

71%

Fixed

STI

LTI

Fixed

STI1

LTI (declined)

1The growth in STI-current as a proportion of overall remuneration seen in the graphs above arises due to the STI award being uncapped on both the upside and the downside. Refer to section 4.2 for more details on the STI-current. 

Malus/Clawback

Termination

The ability to apply Malus Provision or clawback to Deferred STI exists in the unlikely event that business outcomes differ materially from expected  
or if there are any irregularities or other factors that would or have affect the payment of that award. 

On termination, the Executive foregoes any further STI payments which would have otherwise been available for the remainder of the financial year 
under their STI plan.

1 Executive Net Profit Before Tax is calculated based on company profit before tax and before the Executive STI is deducted.  
For the Executive Chair the Executive Net Profit Before Tax is based on company profit before tax before the Chair’s STI is deducted. 

2 ARR is not an IFRS measure and is unaudited, it represents future contracted annual revenue at year end. 

87

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statementsTechnologyOne Executives have an STI set at the start of their contract which is typically 33% of their total targeted remuneration. As noted 
above, this percentage of their total remuneration will increase with the Executive’s tenure. The best way to consider the mechanics of the 
TechnologyOne STI is by way of the following worked example.

Worked example

Consider a candidate who can command a remuneration package of $900,000 in the open market. The TechnologyOne STI opportunity is 
determined as follows:

STI target

Commences at 75% to 100% of fixed remuneration (as established during contract negotiations).

$300,000 is used as the initial STI target. If we assume that NPBT of the Group, applies for this employee and the forecast NPBT is $40m,  
(a 15% increase on the prior year) then contract STI will be $300,000/$40m (or 0.75% of profit)

Assuming an ambitious profit target increase of 15% per annum and actual profit increases of 12% per annum and CPI of 1% per annum, the 
following illustrates the operation of the STI.

Year

1

2

3

Fixed

Profit target ($m)

Actual profit ($m)

          300,000 

          303,000 

          306,030 

40.00

44.80

50.18

38.96

43.64

48.87

STI%

0.75%

0.75%

0.75%

STI target 
(STI % x profit target ($))

Actual STI (STI% x actual profit ($))

         300,000 

         336,030 

         376,354 

         292,200 

         327,264 

         366,536 

4.4 

Long-term incentives (LTI)

LTI remuneration for TechnologyOne Executives is made up of a share-based remuneration element.

4.4.1 

Share based remuneration

TechnologyOne Executives are eligible to participate in an LTI plan. The LTI plan is designed to provide participants with the incentive to deliver 
substantial consistent growth in shareholder value:

Feature

Opportunity

Award vehicle

Performance period

Description

The value of the total number of LTI options and/or rights issued each year (a grant) to an Executive is typically set at 75% to 100% of fixed 
remuneration and is determined during contract negotiation when an Executive is hired. 

Each LTI entitles the Executive the right to purchase one TechnologyOne share in the future at an agreed strike price, subject to meeting specified 
performance targets. The executive has a choice between options or zero price options (performance rights). 

For LTI grants issued during FY20 and onwards, performance is measured at the end of a three-year performance period only (i.e. no annually 
tested LTI measures). The test performed will be average annual growth over the three-year performance period. This is consistent with 
best practice and further aligns our LTI plan with the creation of long-term shareholder wealth. For LTI grants issued prior to the end of FY19, 
performance is measured over a three-year performance period with individual and Company targets tested annually or at the conclusion of the 
three-year performance period.  The performance period commences at the beginning of the fiscal year of the grant date and extends for three 
years to a vesting date.

The number of options and/or rights in the grant are split into tranches based on the weighting of each performance measure. For performance 
measures with a three-year target, the relevant tranche vests at the end of the three-year period in accordance with the vesting schedule provided 
below. 

For performance measures with an annual target, 1/3 of the relevant tranche is tested in accordance with annual performance, however, the LTI will 
not vest until the end of the overall three-year performance period.

For accounting purposes, the expense is recognised in accordance with AASB 2 Share Based Payments over the three-year period

4.3 

Deferred STI

Feature

Opportunity

Award vehicle

Cap

Description

Performance measures

Performance measures for the most recent LTI grants are 

TechnologyOne introduced a Deferred STI in the FY19 year. An amount equal to 25% of the annual STI earned in the year under review is deferred 
(i.e. 20% of total STI) and paid at the conclusion of the two-year period following the end of the financial year.

• 

• 

25% of the options vest based on Relative Total Shareholder Return (rTSR) against the constituents of the ASX All Technology (XTX) index

75% of the options vest based on EPS Growth

Cash

For the same reasons outlined in section 4.2 for the STI, this Deferred STI is also uncapped on both the upside and the downside.

Vesting schedule

For each performance target there is a mid and stretch target. Mid hurdles have been calculated so that if they are achieved, this will create 
substantial shareholder wealth. 

Deferral period and service requirements

The award will only be paid at the conclusion of the two-year period following the end of financial year, on the condition that the Executive KMP 
remains employed with the Company for the entire deferral period.

Malus/Clawback

The Deferred STI component is subject to a malus/clawback provision in that there must be no irregularities or other factors that would or have 
affected the payment of that award.

The following provides a worked example to illustrate the operation of the Deferred STI.  
Amounts recognised for Deferred STI:

As can be seen from the table below, the Deferred STI expense is recognised over a three-year period, being the year on award plus the  
two years of deferral. 

FY

1

2

3

STI  
Measure

NPBT

NPBT

NPBT

STI  
%

0.75%

0.75%

0.75%

Financial 
result ($m)

STI- received 
immediately ($)

Deferred 
STI %

Deferred  
STI

Year 1

Year 2

Year 3

Year 4

Year 5

Amounts recognised for Deferred STI

38.96

43.64

48.87

292,200

327,264

366,536

25%

25%

25%

73,050

24,350

24,350

24,350

-

81,816

91,634

-

-

27,272

27,272

27,272

-

30,545

30,545

30,545

-

-

The total value of the Deferred STI award is retained and will only be paid at the conclusion of the two-year period following the end of the financial year. The Deferred STI component is subject to a Malus Provision in that there 
must be no irregularities or other factors that would affect the payment of that award. For accounting purposes, the expense in relation to this award is recognised over the total three-year deferral period. The Deferred STI was 
introduced for the first time in FY19. The value included for FY19 represented one third of the FY19 award value. The value included for FY20 included one third of the FY19 award value plus one third of the FY20 award value.  
The value included for FY21 includes one third of the FY19 award value plus one third of the FY20 award value plus one third of the FY21 award value.

24,350

51,622

82,167

57,817

30,545

Performance Metric

Growth <5%

5%<= Growth > 15%

Growth >= 15%

EPS growth

0% vest

50% vest at 5% growth with 
linear vesting (50% to 100%) up 
to 15% growth

100% vest

Performance Metric

Percentile < 50%

>=50%  <75%

Percentile>= 75%

Relative TSR1

0% vest

50% vest at 50% relative TSR 
with linear vesting (50% to 100%) 
up to 75% relative TSR

100% vest

The number of options that vest at the end of the relevant performance period is determined as follows: 

•  Number of LTIs earned per three-year performance target = Number of LTIs available for that target x percentage earned x individual 

performance factor2

•  Number of LTIs earned per yearly performance target = 1/3 x number of LTIs available for that target x percentage earned x individual 

performance factor2 

1 Relative TSR targets are determined with reference to our peer group. Our peer group is defined as those constituent companies making up the ASX All Technology Index 
(XTX). 2 The individual performance factor is typically 100% unless Malus Provision is applied. 

The LTI is allocated based on the cost of the option which is calculated with the strike price being the volume weighted average price (VWAP) over 
the 10 days prior to the grant date with no discount for the likelihood of performance conditions being met

The fair value of the LTI related to EPS growth is calculated using the binomial method and the fair value of the LTI related to TSR is calculated 
using the monte carlo method, in accordance with AASB 2 Share-based payment.

In situations where the Vesting Conditions are affected by factors beyond the control of the employee (e.g. global pandemic, trade restrictions, 
war, large-scale natural disasters, profit windfalls or unforeseen tailwinds), the Board has discretion to increase or decrease the number of LTI  
options and/or rights vesting.

The Board retains sole discretion to determine the amount and form of any award that may vest (if any) to prevent any unintended outcomes, or in 
the event of a corporate restructuring or capital event. 

For any single performance metric, the Board also has discretion to apply an Individual Performance Factor (IPF) to adjust the number that vest to 
take into consideration exceptional performance or contribution by an employee. The Board has the authority to increase the number of options 
vesting for any particular performance metric by up to 200%. The extent of this discretion is capped such that the total number of LTI instruments 
that vest will never exceed the maximum LTI opportunity, represented by the total number of LTI options and/or rights offered for all performance 
targets for an executive in that year. 

89

Allocation methodology

Fair value methodology

Board discretion

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statementsFeature

Description

5.  Key questions

Key questions

TechnologyOne approach

The Board has discretion to determine the extent to which LTIs vest based on the period elapsed since the start of the performance period and the 
performance at the time of any change of control event.

Why does our remuneration framework have such 
a high weighting towards variable remuneration?

Our Executive Remuneration Framework aligns with many common practices for ASX200 companies but has been adapted to meet the 
demands of the enterprise software market. Relative to our ASX-listed peers, our Executives receive:

Change of  Control

Cessation of employment

Expiry

Re-testing

Malus

Awards lapse unless the Board determines otherwise, in which case it considers performance of the individual over the relevant period up to the 
date of cessation of employment. 

At the end of the applicable performance period, any LTIs that have vested will expire 5 years after vesting.

We do not revise or re-test our LTIs over the relevant performance period.

The LTI component is subject to a Malus Provision in that there must be no irregularities or other factors that would affect the vesting of the award. 
Under the Malus Provision the Board has the ability to vary the LTI as appropriate e.g. reduce, forfeit, defer for longer period.

Margin loans

Directors and Executives are not permitted to use TechnologyOne securities as security for margin loans.

The following provides a worked example to illustrate the operation of the LTI:

Feature

Award vehicle

Vesting period

LTI grant value

Description

Options

3 years

$300,000

LTI metrics and weighting

EPS (75% weighting) and relative TSR (25% weighting)

Fair value of share option at grant date

Share price at grant date

Exercise price

Assumed growth in share price over the 
vesting period

$1.50

$7.65

$7.39

30%

Amounts recognised for LTI

FY

1

2

LTI metrics

Weighting

Grant number

Fair value

EPS growth %

75%

Relative TSR

25%

150,000

50,000

200,000

225,000

75,000

300,000

Share price at 
grant

Exercise price 
per share

7.65

7.65

7.39

7.39

Year 1

52,500

17,500

Year 2

67,500

Year 3

105,000

22,500

35,000

70,000

90,000

140,000

For the Year 1 tranche of LTIs, the fair value is $300,000, recognised over 3 years, as shown above. The proportion recognised increases from 
year 1 to year 3 as the likelihood of vesting increases. For the purposes of this worked example, we have assumed that the fair value  
of options granted with each metric is the same.

• 

• 

• 

• 

Relatively low fixed remuneration to enable a greater emphasis on performance

Relatively large at-risk short-term incentive (STI) portion aligning Executives to current year performance

Deferred STI component to help further drive long-term shareholder wealth and ensure that we retain high performing Executives

Long-term incentives (LTI) linked to long-term strategy, targets, and shareholder wealth creation

The winning of new business, driving continued profit growth in the current year is the key to our long-term success, and it is for this reason 
our STI as a percentage of the total remuneration is significantly higher than our ASX-listed peers. At the same time, the fixed remuneration 
for our Executives is comparatively low compared to our ASX-listed peers. The significant weighting towards the STI encourages our 
Executives to drive new business and financial performance in the current year, which creates Annual Recurring Revenue (ARR)1 for future 
years, and therefore long-term success and shareholder wealth.

TechnologyOne Executives are exposed to the long-term outcomes of the business through the Deferred STI and a large long-term 
incentive (LTI) component.

The talent pool in Australia for Executives with large scale enterprise software companies is highly competitive. Therefore, it is important to 
ensure that our remuneration framework is appropriately structured for the enterprise software market. We believe that our remuneration 
structure offers the necessary flexibility and incentive to ensure that we attract and retain talented Executives who understand the industry 
and, in turn, drive shareholder value.

Why is the KMP LTI based on EPS growth  
and Relative TSR?

In FY19, earnings per share (EPS) growth and relative total shareholder return (TSR) were introduced to replace historical LTI measures, 
which included net profit after tax (NPAT) growth.  The rationale for the selection of these two measures is as follows:

• 

• 

EPS growth: Ensures that our Executives are remunerated in line with growth in shareholder wealth over the long term. 

Relative TSR: Ensures that our Executives are remunerated in line with the Company’s creation of shareholder wealth  
relative to our peers over the long term. 

The introduction of these two new measures ensures we have LTI targets which are more directly aligned with trends in shareholder wealth 
over the long term. 

There is debate among proxy advisors about the use of TSR as an LTI metric, with some for and some against. Relative TSR may not be 
particularly useful as an incentive on its own, as management have little direct influence over outcomes, however, when combined with 
the EPS growth metric (which has been given a higher weighting) we feel it results in a very effective LTI for our Executive KMP. The 
combination of these metrics ensures that Executives are aligned with shareholder wealth creation (EPS growth) and also ensuring that 
performance is better than that of our peers (rTSR). 

The winning of new business, driving continued profit growth is the key to our long-term success. Having Executives focus solely on net 
profit before tax (NPBT) ensures there is clear line of sight for Executives and transparency for shareholders as to how STI awards are 
determined. The setting of NPBT as the measure (rather than components contributing to NPBT) give executives the flexibility to be agile 
and choose appropriate strategies based on the market environment and arising opportunities to meet their targets. 

NPBT incorporates the outcomes of the key drivers of our business including winning new annual recurring revenue through new  
and existing customers, customer retention, expense management and margin expansion.

Is our STI plan sufficiently challenging with only 
one performance measure?

What is the rationale for having an uncapped STI?

An important element of the success of our STI has been that it is uncapped on the upside and downside. 

The greater the results in the current financial year, the greater the STI. This not only encourages over performance in the current financial 
year for the Company, it has a significant flow on effect in future years through the greater annual recurring revenues for the Company. The 
uncapped STI also helps retain Executives over the long-term, because the more they succeed, the more financial incentive there is to stay 
with us and continue to work hard to achieve each year, and the greater benefit to our shareholders through an ever-increasing recurring 
revenue base. 

Likewise, if the Company under-performs (e.g. loss of customers) or the results in a year are lower (e.g. impairment), there is a significant 
financial impact to Executives as their STI forms a significant portion of their total remuneration. Just as the STI is uncapped on the upside, 
it is also uncapped on the downside. Given that the Executive’s fixed remuneration percentage is significantly lower than our ASX-listed 
peers, under-performance has a significant, negative impact on their total remuneration. 

This performance measure is well-aligned with the interests of shareholders, as NPBT outcomes above target, rewards shareholders as 
well as executives. Poor performance also “penalises” executives as well as shareholders.

Why did we introduce a Deferred STI?

A Deferred STI was introduced in FY19 where an amount equal to 25% of the STI earned in the year under review is awarded and deferred 
for a period of two years (i.e., 20% of total STI). 

The award is only paid out to the Executive if they remain in employment with the Company for the entire deferral period. This deferral:

• 

• 

• 

Assists in retaining high performing Executive KMP

Helps further drive long-term shareholder wealth via executive skin in the game, fostering a long term mind set among executives 

Provides opportunity to forfeit the award.  Prior to its award or vesting, the Remuneration Committee will consider whether there are 
any irregularities or other factors that would affect the payment or vesting of that award.

1ARR is not an IFRS measure and is unaudited, it represents future contracted annual revenue at year end

91

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements6.  Relationship between remuneration and Company performance

Average STI vs. NPBT

6.1 

TechnologyOne’s five-year performance

The below table sets out information showing the creation of shareholder wealth for the years ended 30 September 2017 to 30 September 2021. 
Profits and dividends have grown over the last five years, and growth in the fair value of executives has not exceeded growth in profits over the 
period. 

Actual profit before tax reported ($’000)

Profit before tax growth

Total dividend including special (cps)

Earnings per share (basic)

EPS growth

Share price at start of period

Share price at end of period

Annual Total Shareholder Return (TSR)

3-year TSR

LTI vesting as a % of maximum

1Accounting for revenue for these periods remains under AASB 118. They were not restated in this table for AASB 15

Profits have grown strongly and sustainably over the last five years, 
as have earnings per share and dividends, all while transforming  
from perpetual licenses to a SaaS model. 

The results indicate substantial growth in shareholder value and, since 
TechnologyOne executive remuneration is strongly linked to Company 
profit performance, has seen executives rewarded for  
their achievements. 

As can be seen from the tables above, the Executives’ remuneration 
framework has successfully driven performance and the creation 
of shareholder wealth over the longer term. In addition, Executives’ 
remuneration has been in alignment with overall Company 
performance. 

20171

58,019

9%

10.18

14.20

7%

5.94

5.02

(14%)

78%

100%

20181

66,528

15%

11.02

16.14

14%

5.02

5.58

13%

39%

76%

2019

76,389

15%

11.93

18.43

14%

5.58

7.18

31%

35%

72%

2020

82,470

8%

12.88

19.75

8%

7.18

7.94

12%

58%

98%

2021

97,843

19%

13.91

22.64

15%

7.94

11.36

45%

97%

99%

The graphs on the next page set out information regarding 
TechnologyOne’s performance, earnings and movement in 
shareholder wealth over the past five financial years up to and 
including FY21. Note, figures for 2018 and prior years represent 
reported results which have not been restated for changes in 
accounting policies or accounting standards.

The first graph below shows our average Executives’ STI has grown by 
11% which is below the Company’s Net Profit Before Tax (NPBT) profit 
growth of 13% over the last 5 years. 

'

)
s
0
0
0
$

(

I

T
S

.

g
v
A

$800

$700

$600

$500

$400

$300

$200

$110

$100

$90

$80

$70

$60

$50

$40

$30

$20

$10

$395k

$445k

$568k

$621k

$736k

FY17

FY18

FY19

FY20

FY21

Financial year

Average STI

NPBT

Average STI has grown by 11% which is at a slower rate than  
the 13% growth in reported NPBT over the last 5 years

Our STI structure is working as it drives short-term performance,  
which in turn creates a strong long-term recurring revenue base.  
In the long-term, this creates continuing financial success and 
substantial shareholder wealth for Technology One. 

The second graph below shows that the average Executives’ 
remuneration has been growing at less than the Company’s NPBT.

Average REM vs. NPBT

'

)
s
0
0
0
$

(

M
E
R

.

g
v
A

$1,600

$1,400

$1,200

$1,000

$800

$600

$400

$200

$110

$90

$70

$50

$30

$10

$1m

$1.1m

$1.2m

$1.3m

$1.5m

FY17

FY18

FY19

FY20

FY21

Financial Year

Average REM

NPBT

'

)
s
M
$

(

T
B
P
N

'

)
s
M
$

(

T
B
P
N

7.  Detail of current year 
Executive remuneration and 
performance 
This section describes remuneration outcomes for each executive 
based on performance in FY21 using statutory accounting fair value. 

7.1 

Fixed remuneration

Fixed Remuneration includes base salary and superannuation paid in 
line with the remuneration strategy and principles described in section 
3.1 above. 

7.2 

Short term incentive

The short-term incentives for Executives for FY21 were in line with the 
remuneration framework described in section 4.2 above.

The following tables in section 7.5 show the amounts achieved in FY21 
based on each executive’s agreed percentage of net profit before tax.

Executive Net Profit Before Tax is calculated based on Company 
profit before tax and before the Executive STIs are deducted. For 
the Executive Chair the Executive Net Profit Before Tax is based on 
Company profit before tax before Chair’s STI is deducted. 

7.3 

Deferred short term incentive

The Deferred STI achieved by Executives for FY21 were in line  
with the remuneration framework described in section 4.3 above. 

The following tables in section 7.5 show the statutory accounting  
fair value of the amounts recognised in FY21.

7.4 

Long-term incentive

The long-term incentives granted to Executives for FY21 were in line 
with the remuneration framework described in section 4.4.1 above. 
Refer to section 7.7 below for specific details of the grants for FY21.

The following tables in section 7.5 show the statutory accounting fair 
value of the amounts recognised and instruments forfeited in FY21.

Refer section 7.6 for details of the share options and Executive 
Performance Rights (EPRs) vested in FY21. 99% of instruments  
vested during the year.

Average Executive Remuneration has grown by 11% which is at  
a slower rate than the 13% growth in reported NPBT over the last 
5 years.

NPBT has grown faster than our average Executive remuneration 
which demonstrates how effective our remuneration structure is at 
driving long-term shareholder wealth. 

93

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
7.5 

Detail of Executive remuneration and performance

Adrian Di Marco

Edward Chung

Position

Executive Chair and Chief Strategy and Innovation Officer

Position

Chief Executive Officer

Fixed remuneration

Base salary

2021 
$

2020 
$

Variance 

% Notes

339,056

341,556

The base salary represents the amount earned for the role of Chief 
Strategy and Innovation Officer.

Chairman's fees

141,000

141,000

The Chair's fees are benchmarked every 3 years in line with the  
Group's peers.

Fixed remuneration

Base salary

Directors’ fees

Superannuation

2021
$

2020 
$

Variance 

% Notes

505,568

508,068

-

-

27,500

25,000

Superannuation

27,500

25,000

Total fixed remuneration

533,068

533,068

0.0%

Total fixed remuneration

507,556

507,556

0.0%

99,092,373

83,523,578

18.6%  

STI

STI - profit¹

STI %

Total STI

Total Deferred STI

LTI

Fair value of options recognised

Fair value of options forfeited

Fair value of EPRs recognised

Fair value of EPRs forfeited

Total LTI

1.26%

1.26%

1,248,564

1,052,397

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

STI

STI - profit¹

STI %

Total STI

102,318,557

86,515,918

18.3%  

0.78%

0.78%

798,085

674,824

18.3% Growth in STI is consistent with growth in NPBT, the primary measure  

of STI.

18.6% The STI relates to the role of Chief Strategy and Innovation Officer. Growth 
in STI is consistent with growth in NPBT, the primary measure of STI.

0.0% The Executive Chair has a substantial shareholding so a Deferred STI  

is not required. 

Total Deferred STI

174,678

108,171

LTI

Fair value of options recognised

382,895

339,328

The Executive Chair has a substantial shareholding so has declined an LTI.

Fair value of EPRs recognised

Fair value of options forfeited

-

-

-

-

-

-

61.5% Deferred STI (refer to section 4.3) was introduced in FY19 for the first time. 
FY21 amount includes one third of the FY19 award plus one third of 
the FY20 award plus one third of the FY21 award. The growth shown 
is primarily due to the timing of accounting recognition and does not 
represent growth in remuneration awarded or realised.

The value included for FY21 includes one third of the FY19 LTI fair value 
plus one third of the FY20 LTI fair value plus one third of the FY21 LTI fair 
value. 

The fair value for the forfeitures noted in 12.1 was adjusted for in FY19 
when the annual test was performed. 

Total remuneration

1,756,120

1,559,953

12.6% Total remuneration has grown by 12.6%, less than reported net profit 

Fair value of EPRs forfeited

before tax growth of 19%.

1 Refer to section 7.2 above for the description of the net profit before tax used to calculate the STI.

Fair value of options recognised  
(old scheme)

58,471

116,057

The final tranche of share options vested and were exercised during the 
year. 

Total LTI

441,366

455,385

(3.1%)

Total remuneration

1,947,197

1,771,448

9.9% Total remuneration has grown by 9.9%, less than reported net profit 

before tax growth of 19%. 

1 Refer to section 7.2 above for the description of the net profit before tax used to calculate the STI.

95

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Stuart MacDonald

Position

Chief Operating Officer

Fixed remuneration

Base salary

Directors' fees

Superannuation

2021 
$

2020 
$

Variance 

% Notes

421,117

421,944

-

-

25,827

25,000

Paul Jobbins

Position

Chief Financial Officer

Fixed remuneration

Base salary

Directors' fees

Superannuation

2021 
$

2020 
$

Variance 

% Notes

221,764

222,250

-

-

25,486

25,000

Total fixed remuneration

446,944

446,944

0.0%

Total fixed remuneration

247,250

247,250

0.0%

STI

STI - profit1

STI %

Total STI

102,318,557

86,515,918

18.3%

0.533%

545,358

0.533%

461,130

Total Deferred STI

119,164

73,717

LTI

Fair value of options recognised

139,132

235,508

Fair value of options forfeited

-

Fair value of EPRs recognised

110,862

69,404

Fair value of EPRs forfeited

-

18.3% Growth in STI is consistent with growth in NPBT, the primary measure  

of STI.

61.7% Deferred STI (refer to section 4.3) was introduced in FY19 for the first time. 
FY21 amount includes one third of the FY19 award plus one third of 
the FY20 award plus one third of the FY21 award. The growth shown 
is primarily due to the timing of accounting recognition and does not 
represent growth in remuneration awarded or realised.

The fair value for the forfeitures noted in 12.1 was adjusted for in FY19 
when the annual test was performed. 

Total LTI

249,994

304,912

(18.0%)

Total remuneration

1,361,460

1,286,703

5.8% Total remuneration has grown by 5.8%, less than reported net profit 

before tax growth of 19%. 

1 Refer to section 7.2 above for the description of the net profit before tax used to calculate the STI.

STI

STI - profit¹

STI %

Total STI

102,318,557

86,515,918

18.3%

0.343%

0.343%

350,953

296,750

18.3% Growth in STI is consistent with growth in NPBT, the primary measure  

of STI.

Total Deferred STI

74,944

45,698

64.0% Deferred STI (refer to section 4.3) was introduced in FY19  

LTI

Fair value of options recognised

283,269

174,487

Fair value of options forfeited

Fair value of EPRs recognised

Fair value of EPRs forfeited

Total LTI

Total remuneration

-

-

-

-

-

-

283,269

956,416

174,487

764,185

for the first time. 
FY21 amount includes one third of the FY19 award plus one third of 
the FY20 award plus one third of the FY21 award. The growth shown 
is primarily due to the timing of accounting recognition and does not 
represent growth in remuneration awarded or realised.

The value included for FY21 includes one third of the FY19 LTI fair value 
plus one third of the FY20 LTI fair value plus one third of the FY21 LTI 
fair value. As Mr Jobbins commenced employment during FY19 the 
value included in the table for FY20 represents one third of the FY19 fair 
value plus one third of the FY20 LTI fair value only. The growth shown 
is primarily due to the timing of accounting recognition and does not 
represent growth in remuneration awarded or realised.

The fair value for the forfeitures noted in 12.1 was adjusted for in FY19 
when the annual test was performed.

62.3%

25.2% Total remuneration has grown by 25.2%. As Mr Jobbins commenced 

employment during FY19, the growth shown is primarily due to the timing 
of accounting recognition for LTI fair value (increasing over the three-year 
performance period) and does not represent growth in remuneration 
awarded or realised. 

1 Refer to section 7.2 above for the description of the net profit before tax used to calculate the STI.

97

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
7.6 

Options and EPRs that became eligible to vest during FY21 

7.7 

Options/EPRs that have been granted in FY20 and FY21 and not yet vested 

During the year, Edward Chung, Stuart MacDonald and Paul Jobbins completed a three-year performance period relating to the LTI instruments 
granted to them in FY19 and vesting in FY21. 100% of the Relative TSR options became eligible to vest and 99% of the EPS options, resulting in 
99% of total LTI vesting. 

A summary of the targets set and performance against each target and options which have vested and are available to be exercised has been  
set out below:

Edward Chung

Grant year

Performance 
measure

Option or EPR

FY19

Relative TSR

EPS Growth

Option

Option

Option

Option

Number of LTIs 
available for 
target

43,766 

43,766 

43,766 

43,766 

    175,064

Testing

Testing year

Target

Performance 
measure 
achieved

Number due 
to forfeit

LTIs vested % LTI vested

3 year

Annual

Annual

Annual

FY21

75% percentile

76%

               -   

         43,766 

FY19

FY20

FY21

>15%

>15%

>15%

14%

          2,188 

         41,578 

8%¹

15%

               -   

         43,766 

               -   

         43,766 

       172,876 

100%

95%

100%

100%

99%

Stuart MacDonald

Grant year

Performance 
measure

Option or EPR

Number of LTIs 
available for 
target

Relative TSR

EPR

                 11,722 

FY19

EPS Growth

EPR

                 11,721 

EPR

                 11,721 

EPR

                 11,721 

              46,885 

Paul Jobbins

Testing

Testing year

Target

Performance 
measure 
achieved

Number due 
to forfeit

LTIs vested % LTI vested

3 year

Annual

Annual

Annual

FY21

75% percentile

76%

               -   

         11,722 

FY19

FY20

FY21

>15%

>15%

>15%

14%

             586 

         11,135 

8%¹

15%

               -   

         11,721 

               -   

         11,721 

         46,299 

100%

95%

100%

100%

99%

Grant year

Performance 
measure

Option or EPR

Number of LTIs 
available for 
target

Testing

Testing year

Target

Performance 
measure 
achieved

Number due 
to forfeit

LTIs vested % LTI vested

Relative TSR

EPS Growth

FY19

Option

Option

Option

Option

53,864 

53,864 

53,864 

53,864 

3 year

Annual

Annual

Annual

             215,456 

FY21

75% percentile

76%

               -   

         53,864 

FY19

FY20

FY21

>15%

>15%

>15%

14%

          2,693 

         51,171 

8%¹

15%

               -   

         53,864 

               -   

         53,864 

       212,763 

100%

95%

100%

100%

99%

1As disclosed in sections 3.2 and 3.4 of the FY20 Remuneration Report, the Board exercised discretion for option tranches with a FY20 test for EPS Growth, given exceptional performance of the KMP during previously unforeseen 
circumstances, (i.e. the global COVID pandemic). It is important to note the LTI targets were set before COVID, and were both unrealistic and unfair under these circumstances, and so the board exercised discretion to rectify the 
situation. It should be noted the company delivered record revenue (up 4%), record profit (up 8%) and record SaaS ARR growth (up 32%) in FY20.  It should also be noted this was the first time, in 33 years, the company had ever 
exercised Board discretion. This was an historical decision made for FY20 testing, and was not repeated for the testing of FY21 tranches.

Edward Chung

Grant year

FY20

FY21

Stuart MacDonald

Grant year

FY20

FY21

Paul Jobbins

Grant year

FY20

FY21

Performance 
measure

Number of LTIs 
available for target

Relative TSR

                   66,160 

EPS Growth

                 198,479 

Relative TSR

                   63,730 

EPS Growth

                 191,189 

Testing

Testing year

Target

Performance 
measure achieved

LTIs due to vest

3 year

3 year

3 year

3 year

FY22

FY22

FY23

FY23

75% percentile

To be tested at the end of FY22

>15%

To be tested at the end of FY22

75% percentile

To be tested at the end of FY23

>15%

To be tested at the end of FY23

Performance 
measure

Number of LTIs 
available for target

Relative TSR

                   41,849 

EPS Growth

                 125,547 

Relative TSR

                   38,113 

EPS Growth

                 114,339 

Testing

Testing year

Target

Performance 
measure achieved

LTIs due to vest

3 year

3 year

3 year

3 year

FY22

FY22

FY23

FY23

75% percentile

To be tested at the end of FY22

>15%

To be tested at the end of FY22

75% percentile

To be tested at the end of FY23

>15%

To be tested at the end of FY23

Performance 
measure

Number of LTIs 
available for target

Relative TSR

                   36,629 

EPS Growth

                 109,887 

Relative TSR

                   33,359 

EPS Growth

                 100,077 

Testing

Testing year

Target

Performance 
measure achieved

LTIs due to vest

3 year

3 year

3 year

3 year

FY22

FY22

FY23

FY23

75% percentile

To be tested at the end of FY22

>15%

To be tested at the end of FY22

75% percentile

To be tested at the end of FY23

>15%

To be tested at the end of FY23

99

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statementsService agreements for the  
Executive KMP 

Remuneration and other terms and conditions of employment for 
Executive KMP are formalised in service agreements which are 
reviewed each year. All Executive KMP service agreements are 
rolling contracts which cease following notice of termination by either 
employee or employer.

The following table presents some of the key contractual 
arrangements for the Executive KMP:   

KMP

Contract term

Termination notice 
by either party

Post-employment 
restraint

Executive Chair

CEO

Other Executive KMP

Ongoing

Ongoing

Ongoing

3 months

6 months

12 weeks

12 months

12 months

12 months

If a service agreement is terminated, payment in lieu of notice that is 
not worked may be provided, in addition to any statutory entitlements. 
No other additional termination or post-employment benefits are 
provided on termination of employment. Refer to sections 4.3 and 
4.4 respectively for treatment of STIs and LTIs on cessation of 
employment. 

The Executive Chair’s fixed remuneration package is established to 
compensate him for executing the role of Chair and also for that of 
Chief Strategy and Innovation Officer (as tabled below).

In FY21, the Chairman’s fixed remuneration consists of:

Role

Chairman

Chief Strategy and Innovation Officer

Total fixed remuneration

Fixed remuneration

         141,000 

         366,556 

         507,556 

The Executive Chair also receives an STI component for his role as 
Chief Strategy and Innovation Officer. 

As the Chair is also an Executive, the remuneration for performing  
the Chair role (exclusive of Directors’ fees) is not included in the  
Non-Executive Director Fee Pool.

10.  Detail of Executive  

remuneration for FY21 
The remuneration package for Executives, including the Executive 
Chair, for FY21 comprises the amounts outlined in the following tables.

There is no maximum or minimum STI for Executives as the Company 
wants to ensure a strong focus on performance in the current year. 

8.  Non-executive Director fees

9. 

Determination of Non-executive Director fees

In FY21, Board fees remain at $141,000 per Director, including statutory 
superannuation contributions. This was not increased for FY21. No 
additional fees are paid in respect of committee attendance.

Directors’ Fees are normally reviewed every three years by an 
independent consultant and the setting of fees is to be consistent 
with comparable companies by market capitalisation. Fee increases 

between independent reviews are capped at CPI. 

Aggregate fee pool

The total amount of Directors’ fees is capped at a maximum pool 
that is approved by shareholders. The current fee pool is capped 
at $1,500,000, which was approved by shareholders at the Annual 
General Meeting on 26 February 2019. Non-executive Directors 
receive aggregate fees to recognise both their contribution to the 
work of the Board and the associated committees that they serve. 
Non-executive Directors do not receive any performance-related 
remuneration.

FY22 aggregate fee pool and Non-Executive Director fees

It is proposed that the current fee pool remain unchanged for FY22, 
capped at $1,500,000. Non-executive Director fees are set to increase 
in line with CPI, as per Board policy.

Director shareholdings

Directors are required to hold a minimum shareholding of one 
year’s Directors’ fees (pre-tax) in TechnologyOne shares. Directors 
are required to rectify any short fall within a 12-month period. New 
Directors are allowed 36 months to meet this requirement.

2021

Directors of TechnologyOne Limited

Balance at 
the end of the 
year

% of Mandatory  
Shareholding Requirement

A Di Marco

R McLean

J Mactaggart

R Anstey

Dr J Andrews

S Doyle

C Rosenberg

P Ball

P O’Sullivan

17,378,500

69,737

26,902,500

30,000

30,600

18,280

27,533

21,900

15,509

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

87%

The Board in total holds 44,494,559 shares representing 14% of the 
total shareholding of the Company. Individual holdings are as shown 
above. All Directors are compliant with the mandatory shareholding 
requirement except for Pat O’Sullivan, who has until 2024 to meet the 
requirement.

11.  Statutory Remuneration
The information in the table below is based on the statutory accounting fair value of remuneration earned for each KMP and does not represent 
the value offered or realised. 

Short-term employee benefits

n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
r

d
e
x
i
F

$

’
s
r
o
t
c
e
r
i
D

s
e
e
f

$

n
o
i
t
a
u
n
n
a
r
e
p
u
S

$

n
o
i
t
a
r
e
n
u
m
e
r

d
e
x
fi

l

a
t
o
T

$

t
n
e
m
y
o
p
m
e

l

t
s
o
P

s
t
fi
e
n
e
b

e
v
i
t
n
e
c
n
I

m
r
e
t
-
t
r
o
h
S

s
t
fi
e
n
e
b
n
o
i
t
a
n
m
r
e
$ T

i

$

I
T
S
d
e
r
r
e
f
e
D

I
T
S
d
e
r
r
e
f
e
D

m
r
e
t
g
n
o
L

s
e
v
i
t
n
e
c
n

i

e
r
a
h
s

f
o
e
u
a
$ V

l

s
n
o
i
t
p
o

f
o
e
u
a
$ V

l

s
t
h
g
i
r
e
c
n
a
m
r
o
f
r
e
p

$

r
o
i
r
p
n
o
h
t
w
o
r
g
$ %

r
o
i
r
p
n
o
h
t
w
o
r
g
$ %

I
T
L
l
c
x
e
r
a
e
y

I
T
L
l
c
n

i

r
a
e
y

l

a
t
o
T

$

Name

Non-executive Directors

R McLean 
(Non-executive Director)

J Mactaggart  
(Non-executive Director)

K Blinco  
(Non-executive Director)¹

R Anstey  
(Non-executive Director)

Dr J Andrews  
(Non-executive Director 

S Doyle  
(Non-Executive Director)

C Rosenberg  
(Non-Executive Director)

P Ball  
(Non-Executive Director)

Pat O' Sullivan²

Executives

A Di Marco  
(Executive Chairman)³

E Chung  
(Chief Executive Officer)⁴

S MacDonald  
(Chief Operating Officer)⁵

P Jobbins 
(Chief Financial Officer)⁶

2021

2020

2021

2020

2021

2020

2021

2020

2021

2020

2021

2020

2021

2020

2021

2020

2021

2020

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

128,767

12,233

141,000

128,767

12,233

141,000

128,767

12,233

141,000

128,767

12,233

141,000

53,653

5,097

58,750

128,767

12,233

141,000

128,767

12,233

141,000

128,767

12,233

141,000

128,767

12,233

141,000

128,767

12,233

141,000

128,767

12,233

141,000

128,767

12,233

141,000

128,767

12,233

141,000

128,767

12,233

141,000

128,767

12,233

141,000

75,114

75,114

7,136

7,136

82,250

82,250

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

2021

339,056

141,000

27,500

507,556

1,248,564

2020

341,556

141,000

25,000

507,556

1,052,397

2021

505,568

2020

508,068

2021

421,117

2020

421,944

2021

221,764

2020

222,250

-

-

-

-

-

-

27,500

533,068

798,085

25,000

533,068

674,824

25,827

446,944

545,358

25,000

446,944

461,130

25,486

247,250

350,953

25,000

247,250

296,750

Total Executive KMP

2021

1,487,505

141,000

106,313

1,734,818

2,942,960

2020

1,493,818

141,000

100,000

1,734,818

2,485,101

Total (Non-Executive 
Directors and Executive 
KMP)

2021

1,487,505

1,096,023

197,040

2,780,568

2,942,960

2020

1,493,818

1,117,484

192,766

2,804,068

2,485,101

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

174,678

441,366

108,171

455,385

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

141,000

0%

0%

141,000

141,000

0%

0%

141,000

58,750

-58%

-58%

141,000

141,000

0%

0%

141,000

141,000

0%

0%

141,000

141,000

0%

0%

141,000

141,000

0%

0%

141,000

141,000

71%

71%

82,250

82,250

N/A

N/A

-

1,756,120

13%

13%

1,559,953

1,947,197

14%

10%

1,771,448

119,164

139,132

110,862

1,361,460

13%

6%

73,717

235,508

69,404

1,286,703

74,944

283,269

45,698

174,487

-

-

956,416

14%

25%

764,185

368,786

863,767

110,862

6,021,193

13%

12%

227,586

865,380

69,404

5,382,289

368,786

863,767

110,862

7,066,943

10%

10%

227,586

865,380

69,404

6,451,539

1Mr Kevin Blinco resigned 23 February 2021. 2Mr Pat O’ Sullivan was appointed on 2 March 2021. 3Mr Di Marco was again offered an LTI of $400K which he declined in the 2020/2021 year, as he has in previous years. The 
Remuneration Committee acknowledges that Mr Di Marco’s existing significant shareholding in TechnologyOne provides the benefits that the LTI aims to achieve. Mr Di Marco’s STI is calculated as 1.26% of Group NPBT. Mr Di Marco’s 
remuneration grew by 13% on the prior year, due to his STI being up 19% in line with company profit. 4Mr Chung’s remuneration grew by 10% on the prior year. Growth in remuneration other than LTI was 14%. Mr Chung’s STI is 
calculated as 0.78% of Executive NPBT, his STI is up 18%, in line with the increase in Executive NPBT. 5Mr MacDonald’s remuneration grew by 6% on the prior year, Growth in remuneration other than LTI was 13%. Mr Macdonald’s STI 
is calculated as 0.533% of Executive NPBT, his STI is up 18%, in line with the increase in Executive NPBT. 5Mr Jobbins’s remuneration grew by 25% on the prior year. Growth in remuneration other than LTI was 14%. Mr Jobbins’s STI is 
calculated as 0.343% of Executive NPBT, his STI is up 18%, in line with the increase in Executive NPBT. 

101

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
12.  Additional statutory disclosures

12.1 

Long-term incentive scheme

In 2016, TechnologyOne replaced its previous Executive Option Plan (EOP) with an LTI plan aligned to market, shareholder and Executive 
requirements. Options and EPRs issued under the new plan are outlined in the tables below.

Options

2021

Name

Edward Chung

Stuart MacDonald

Paul Jobbins

Opening balance of 
share options

Number of options 
granted during the 
period

Number of options 
exercised during the 
period

Number of options 
forfeited during the 
vesting period*

Closing balance of 
share options

Vested and 
exercisable

842,461

539,229

361,972

254,917

152,450

133,434

(402,758)

(371,833)

-

(2,188)

-

(2,693)

692,432

319,846

492,713

172,876

-

212,763

Unvested

519,556

319,846

279,950

Executive Performance Rights

2021

Name

Edward Chung

Stuart MacDonald

Paul Jobbins

Opening balance of 
EPRs

Number of EPRs 
granted during the 
period

Number of EPRs 
exercised during the 
period

Number of EPRs 
forfeited during the 
vesting period*

Closing balance 
of EPRs

Vested and 
exercisable

Unvested

-

46,885

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(586)

-

-

-

46,299

46,299

-

-

-

-

-

*Options and EPRs forfeited during the vesting period, are due to non-achievement of performance targets set by the Board. The Board is focused on ensuring that management remuneration and shareholder value are aligned by 
setting performance targets that create long-term shareholder wealth. 

For details of grants under the previous EOP plan, please refer to section 12.3.

The model inputs for options granted to Executives are as follows:

(a)  Options are granted for no consideration. Each tranche vests at the end of the three-year period,  

subject to meeting performance hurdles.

(b)  Dividend yield – 1.6%

(c)  Expected volatility – 33.54%

(d)  Risk-free interest rate – 0.1%

(e)  Price of shares on grant date – $8.07

(f) 

Fair value of options – $1.77

The performance measures for LTI grants made in FY21 are presented below. The performance targets, set out below, are such that they are all 
considered to be challenging targets that, if met, will drive significant shareholder wealth creation.

Performance Metrics

Performance period

Testing

Weighting (all KMP)

EPS growth

Relative TSR1

3 years

3 years

3 years

3 years

75%

25%

The performance targets to be achieved by the Executives are set out below:

Performance Metric

Growth <5%

5%<= Growth < 15%

Growth >= 15%

EPS growth

0% vest

50% vest at 5% growth with 
linear vesting (50% to 100%) 
up to 15% growth

100% vest

Performance Metric

Percentile < 50% >=50%  <75%

Percentile>= 75%

Relative TSR1

0% vest

50% vest at 50th percentile for 
relative TSR with linear vesting 
(50% to 100%) up to 75th 
percentile for relative TSR

100% vest

12.2 

Fair value of options granted in FY21

1Relative TSR targets are determined with reference to our peer group. Our peer group is defined as those constituent companies making up the ASX All Technology Index (XTX).

Number of options 
granted during the 
period¹

Weighted average 
fair value per options 
issued during the 
period²

Name

Grant date

Exercise price

Vesting date

Expiry Date

Fair value of grant

Edward Chung

254,917

                      1.77 

22/01/2021

Stuart MacDonald

152,450

                      1.77 

22/01/2021

Paul Jobbins

133,434

                      1.77 

22/01/2021

7.85

7.85

7.85

22/01/2024

22/01/2026

22/01/2024

22/01/2026

22/01/2024

22/01/2026

451,505

270,017

236,336

1 LTIs are offered to Executive KMP as either options (with an exercise price) or EPRs (executive performance rights issued at market price).

2 The assessed fair value at grant date of options granted to the individuals is recognised over the period from grant date to vesting date. The amount is included in the remuneration tables above.

12.3 

Quarantined Executive Option Plan (EOP) (now  
superseded)

Share options were granted to Executives by the Board based on the 
option plan approved by the Board.

Previously, TechnologyOne had contracts with executives which 
needed to be honoured. These pre-existing contracts were 
quarantined and as existing Executive Contracts come to an end, they 
will be renegotiated so that the LTI is based on the 2016 LTI plan going 
forward. All new appointments of Executives to the Company will be 
under the 2016 LTI plan. For the sake of disclosure, details of the now 
obsolete and quarantined EOP are provided below.

Under the EOP, options were issued with a strike price set typically 
at a 0% to 25% discount on the volume weighted average price for 
the 10 days prior to the grant date. The discount could be forfeited 
prior to vesting at the Board's discretion based on the performance 
of the Executive. The option could also be withheld by the Executive 
Chairman for unsatisfactory performance.

The options vest if and when the Executive satisfies the period of 
service contained in each option grant. 

The contractual life of each option varies between two and five years. 
There are no cash settlement alternatives.

Options granted under this plan carry no dividend or voting rights.

When exercisable, each option is convertible into one ordinary 
TechnologyOne share. Further information is set out in note 31 to the 
financial statements.

Edward Chung is the only current Executive KMP with LTIs issued 
under this plan. The final tranche of share options issued under this 
quarantined plan vested and were exercised during the year.

2021

Name

Balance at start of 
the year

Granted as 
compensation

Exercised

Forfeited

Balance at the end 
of the year

Vested and 
exercisable

Edward Chung

                 167,000 

-

(167,000)

-

                         -   

-

Unvested

-

103

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
 
12.4 

Equity instruments held by Key Management Personnel

The number of shares in the Group held during the financial year by each Director and Senior Executive of Technology One Limited,  
including their personally related parties, are set out below. There were no shares granted during the reporting period as compensation.

2021

Name

Directors of TechnologyOne Limited

Balance at start of the year

Purchased during the year

Sale during the year

Balance at the end of the year

A Di Marco

R McLean

J Mactaggart

K Blinco

R Anstey

Dr J Andrews

S Doyle

C Rosenberg

P Ball

P O' Sullivan

2021

Name

20,378,500

69,737

30,902,500

200,000

25,500

30,600

18,280

27,533

18,000

-

-

-

-

-

4,500

-

-

-

3,900

15,509

(3,000,000)

-

(4,000,000)

(200,000)

-

-

-

-

-

-

17,378,500

69,737

26,902,500

-

30,000

30,600

18,280

27,533

21,900

15,509

Balance at start of the year

Received during  
the year

Sale during the year

Balance at the end of the year

Senior Executives of the Group

E Chung

S MacDonald

P Jobbins

733,000

-

-

569,826

371,901

68

(402,758)

(316,833)

-

900,068

55,068

68

2020

Name

Directors of TechnologyOne Limited

Balance at start of the year

Purchased during the year

Sale during the year

Balance at the end of the year

A Di Marco

R McLean

J Mactaggart

K Blinco

R Anstey

Dr J Andrews

S Doyle

C Rosenberg

P Ball

2020

Name

27,378,500

111,000

38,902,500

200,000

25,500

30,600

12,375

27,533

9,000

-

-

-

-

-

-

5,905

-

9,000

(7,000,000)

(41,263)

(8,000,000)

-

-

-

-

-

20,378,500

69,737

30,902,500

200,000

25,500

30,600

18,280

27,533

18,000

Balance at start of the year

Received during  
the year on the  
exercise of options

Sale during the year

Balance at the end of the year

Senior Executives of the Group

E Chung

S MacDonald

P Jobbins

566,000

-

-

167,000

271,137

-

-

(271,137)

-

733,000

-

-

12.5 

Loans to Key Management Personnel

There have been no loans to Directors or Executives during the financial year (2020 - nil).

12.6 

Other transactions with Key Management Personnel

During the year there were no transactions with the Key Management Personnel. This report is made in accordance with a resolution of Directors.

105

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
Corporate Governance Statement

The Board of Directors of the Company is responsible for its corporate 
governance. The Board guides and monitors the business and affairs 
of the Company on behalf of the shareholders by whom they are 
elected and to whom they are accountable.

The Directors have established guidelines for the operation of the 
Board and its Committees. Set out below are the Company’s main 
corporate governance practices.

The TechnologyOne Board routinely considers industry governance 
initiatives of benefit to the Company and its many stakeholders. The 
Board has adopted the 4th Edition of the ASX Corporate Governance 
Principles and Recommendations.

The Corporate Governance Statement, as well as supporting 
documents are available on the Company’s internet site: www.
technologyonecorp.com/company/investors/corporate-governance

Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer.

 • Setting the highest business standards and code of ethical 

behaviour.

 • Overseeing the establishment and implementation of the risk 
management system, and annually reviewing its effectiveness.

 • Decisions relating to the appointment or removal of the Company 

Secretary.

 • To review and evaluate the performance of the Board as a whole, 
each Committee, key Executives and each Director on an annual 
basis. 

The Board has the authority to delegate any of their powers to 
committees consisting of such Directors and external consultants, as 
the Board think fit. The Board has established a number of committees 
as follows: 

Board of Directors
The Board of the Company currently comprises nine Directors and 
includes:

Name

Position

Adrian Di Marco

Executive Chair - Major shareholder

Pat O’Sullivan

Non-Executive Director - Deputy Chair / Lead 
Independent Director

John Mactaggart

Non-Executive Director - Major shareholder

Ronald McLean

Non-Executive Director - Independent

Richard Anstey

Non-Executive Director - Independent

Appointed

08/12/1999

02/03/2021

08/12/1999

08/12/1999

02/12/2005

 • Nomination & Governance Committee

 • Audit & Risk Committee

 • Remuneration Committee

Board papers are prepared for the Directors, containing detailed 
operational reports from each region and department in the Company, 
highlighting:

 • Operational performance.

 • Initiatives undertaken/completed.

 • Identified problems/risks and proposed solutions.

The Managing Director and Chief Executive Officer also prepare a 
summary report that highlights:

 • Input into and subsequent approval of the budget including 
Operating Expenditure and Capital Expenditure, and any 
significant variations.

 • Oversight of the Company, including its control and accountability 

systems.

 • Input into and subsequent approval of changes to internal systems 

and controls.

 • Review, and accept/reject recommendations from sub-

committees such as Audit & Risk, Remuneration and Nomination & 
Governance committees.

 • Input into and ratifying any acquisitions and divestitures.

 • Oversee the establishment and implementation of a risk 

management system, and review regularly the effectiveness of the 
Company’s implementation of that system.

 • Oversee the ongoing development by management of an 

enterprise-wide risk management framework for management of 
material risks.

Director Principles
The Directors operate in accordance with the following broad 
principles:

 • The Board should comprise of at least three members, but 

no more than 10. The current Board membership is nine. The 
Board may increase the number of Directors where it is felt that 
additional expertise in specific areas is required. The Company 
believes that its current size enables the Company to be more 
effective and to react quickly to opportunities and mitigate threats.

 • The Board should be comprised of Directors with an appropriate 
mix of skills, qualifications, expertise, experience and diversity. 
The skills, experience and expertise which the Board considers 
to be particularly relevant include those listed above. In respect 
of diversity, the Board recognises that diversity relates to, but is 
not limited to gender, age, ethnicity and cultural background. The 
Board values diversity and recognises the individual contribution 
that people can make and the opportunity for innovation that 
diversity brings.

 • Periodically review the adequacy and effectiveness of the 

Company’s policies and procedures relating to risk management 
and compliance.

 • The Board shall meet on both a planned basis and an unplanned 
basis when required, and have available all necessary information 
to participate in an informed discussion of agenda items.

All other matters are referred to management.

 • The Directors are entitled to be paid expenses incurred in 

BOARD SKILLS
As a collective, the Board has extensive commercial skills and 
experience which provide a solid base for the governance of the 
Company. The Board has a combination of experience in the following 
core areas:

Jane Andrews

Non-Executive Director - Independent

22/02/2016

 • Financial performance year to date and forecast for the full year.

 • Strategic and Commercial Acumen

Sharon Doyle

Non-Executive Director - Independent

28/02/2018

 • Significant issues.

Cliff Rosenberg

Non-Executive Director - Independent

27/02/2019

 • Significant changes proposed.

Peter Ball

Non-Executive Director - Independent

 02/03/2020

 • Proposed strategic initiatives.

1 Ron McLean held the position of Deputy Chair until Pat O’Sullivan’s appointment on 2 March 2021.

The following information is provided in the Corporate Governance 
section of the Company’s Annual Report:

 • Details of names, qualifications, skills, experience and dates of 

appointment of each Board member.

 • The number of meetings of the Board and the names of 

attendees.

 • Explanation of any departures from the ASX Corporate 

Governance Principles and Recommendations.

On a regular basis, members of the Senior Leadership Team are 
invited to present to the Board directly and to answer questions the 
Board may have.

The strategy of the Company, as well as matters reserved to the 
Board, are reviewed annually by the Board.

Matters reserved to the Board
Matters that are reserved to the Board are as follows:

 • Communications with shareholders and the market in general, 
including ASX announcements, through the Chair of the Board.

 • Input into and subsequent approval of corporate strategy and 

The role of the Board is as follows:

performance objectives.

 • Setting objectives, goals and strategic direction for management, 

 • Reviewing and ratifying systems of risk management, internal 

with a view to maximising shareholder value.

 • Input into and ratifying any significant changes to the Company.

 • Adopting an annual budget and monitoring financial performance.

 • Ensuring adequate internal controls exist and are appropriately 

monitored for compliance.

 • Ensuring significant business risks are identified and appropriately 

managed.

compliance and control, codes of conduct and legal compliance 
(ASX, ASIC, and ATO).

 • Input into and subsequent approval of significant organisational 

structure/restructure.

 • Review of the Managing Director, Chief Executive Officer and 

Company Secretary to the relevant Code of Conduct established 
by the Board.

 • Appointing and removing the Managing Director and Chief 

 • Selecting, appointing and reviewing the performance of the 

Executive Officer and monitoring their performance respectively.

 • Finance and Taxation

 • Risk and Compliance

 • IT and Communications Industry

 • Software and Product Development

 • Start-ups and Early Stage Investments

 • Corporate Governance

 • Sales and Marketing

 • People, Culture and Conduct

 • Executive Management and Leadership

 • Listed Entities

 • International Business

The Board as a whole benefits from the combination of the Director’s 
individual skills, experience and expertise in particular areas, as well 
as the varying perspectives that arise from the Board’s interactions 
through their diverse backgrounds.

The Board believes that its current membership provides a 
suitable level of skills to properly guide the Company and deliver 
the Company’s strategic objectives and provide a solid base for 
governance. 

The Board assesses its level of skills annually and will address any 
requirements for additional skills that it feels would be in the best 
interest of the Company in response to wider market factors and the 
growth of the Company. The Board has determined the core skills for 
its governance of the Company.

connection with the execution of their duties as Directors. Each 
Director is therefore able to seek independent professional advice 
at the Company’s expense, where it is in connection with their 
duties and responsibilities as Director. The Company policy is 
that a Director wishing to seek independent professional advice 
should advise the Chair at least 48 hours before doing so.

 • The Directors and Officers will not engage in short term trading 

of the Company’s shares. Furthermore, the Directors and Officers 
will not buy or sell shares at a time when they possess information 
which, if disclosed publicly, would be likely to materially affect 
the market price of the Company’s shares. Information is not 
considered to be generally available until a reasonable time has 
elapsed to allow the market to absorb these announcements. A 
detailed policy exists on this matter – refer below, section: Trading 
in Company Securities. 

 • Directors have a clear understanding of the corporate and 

regulatory expectations of them. To this end, formal letters of 
appointment are made for each Director setting out the key terms 
and conditions, any special duties or arrangements, remuneration 
and expenses, their rights and entitlements, confidentiality and 
rights of access to corporate information, as well as Indemnity and 
Insurance cover provided. 

 • Newly appointed Directors undertake an induction course 

covering the Company’s strategy, products and operations. They 
are also provided a copy of the Company’s constitution, charters 
and key policies.

 • Directors are required to disclose Directors’ interests and any 

matters that may affect the Director’s independence. This includes 
disclosure of conflicts of interest, which may include transactions 
with family members or related entities.

 • If there is a potential conflict of interest, conflicted Directors must 
immediately inform the Board and abstain from deliberations 
on such matters. Such Directors are not permitted to exercise 
any influence over other Board members. If the Board believes 
the conflict of interest is material or significant, the Directors 
concerned will not be allowed to attend the meeting or receive 
the relevant Board papers.

107

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statementsDirector independence
The Board comprises a majority of independent Non-Executive 
Directors who have broad commercial experience and bring 
independence, accountability and judgement in discharging the 
Board’s responsibilities to ensure optimal returns to shareholders and 
the ongoing provision of benefits to the Company’s employees.

The Board is required to disclose any new information that could, 
or would be reasonably perceived to influence, or reasonably be 
perceived to influence, in a material respect their capacity to bring an 
independent judgement to bear on the issues before the Board and to 
act in the best interests of the Company and its shareholders.

The independence of the Directors is assessed annually in 
accordance with the ASX Corporate Governance Principles and 
Recommendations.

TechnologyOne does not have casual, ad-hoc informal relationships 
between the Directors and Senior Executives and provides only formal 
interaction between the Directors and Senior Executives in order 
to maintain the independence of each Director.  All interactions are 
formal in nature and documented.  TechnologyOne believes that by 
doing this, it maintains the independence of the Directors and nullifies 
the impact of tenure on independence.  These formal interactions 
include presentations to the Board throughout the year on their 
business unit strategies and outcomes.  Any other interaction by a 
Board Member and a Senior Executive is only under prior approval by 
the Chair.

TechnologyOne will only enter into an agreement for the provision of 
consultancy or similar services by a Director or 

Senior Executive or by a related party of theirs if TechnologyOne has 
independent advice that the services being provided are outside the 
ordinary scope of their duties as a Director or Senior Executive; the 
agreement is on arm’s length terms; and the remuneration payable 
under it is reasonable and with full disclosure of the material terms to 
securityholders.

The Board acknowledges tenure as a factor potentially impacting 
independence so assesses each director annually to ensure their 
independence is maintained.

The ASX guidelines states that it “recognises that the interests of a 
listed entity and its security holders are likely to be well served by 
having a mix of directors, some with a longer tenure with a deep 
understanding of the entity and its business and some with a shorter 
tenure with fresh ideas and perspective.”

The Company has set the objective to increase the Board size, 
with the aim of adding additional independent directors, with Jane 
Andrews’ appointment in the 2016 financial year, Sharon Doyle’s 
appointment in the 2018 financial year, Cliff Rosenberg’s appointment 
in the 2019 financial year, Peter Ball appointed in the 2020 financial 
year and Pat O’Sullivan appointed in the 2021 financial year resulting 
in an indisputable majority of independent directors.

TechnologyOne has aligned its Committee composition strategy 
to comply with the ASX Corporate Governance Principle 
recommendations, ensuring that newly appointed Directors are made 
members of the appropriate Committees once they have had sufficient 
time to develop a comprehensive understanding of TechnologyOne’s 
operations. 

Lead Independent Director
The Company has appointed Pat O’Sullivan as the Deputy Chair 
and Lead Independent Director.  The Lead Independent Director 
represents the interests of shareholders where the Executive Chair is 
unable to do so due to a conflict of interest.  

Audit & risk committee

The Board has established an Audit & Risk Committee. The Committee 
is comprised of:

Name

Position

Principles of the Audit & Risk 
Committee
The Committee operates in accordance with the following broad 
principles:

The role of Lead Independent Director includes:

Peter Ball (Chair)

Independent Non-Executive Director 

 • Representing the independent Directors as the most senior 

independent Director;  

 • Acting as principle liaison between the independent Directors and 

the Chair; and

 • Advising the Board with reference to the other independent 
Directors on the matters where there is a conflict of interest.

Director Appointments
All Directors, both Executive and Non-Executive, receive written 
notifications of their appointment and a new Director induction 
pack which details the terms and conditions of their appointment, 
remuneration (including superannuation contributions), continuous 
disclosure requirements (including interests in the Company), ongoing 
confidentiality obligations, Company policies on when to seek 
independent professional advice, and the Company’s indemnity and 
insurance measures.  

Prior to appointment, appropriate checks are undertaken on the 
candidates and relevant information provided to shareholders to 
consider when voting on the election of the Director.  Relevant 
information is also provided for shareholders to consider when voting 
to re-elect existing Directors upon rotation.  Executive Directors 
and Senior Executives of the Company will also have formal written 
employment agreements which set out the terms of their employment, 
roles and responsibilities, reporting lines, remuneration, confidentiality 
and termination provisions.

All Directors and Senior Executives are required to comply with key 
corporate policies which include, but are not limited to, Code of 
Business Conduct, Share Trading Policy, Insider Trading Policy, Privacy 
Policy and Diversity Policy.

All new Directors and Senior Executives participate in the Company’s 
formal on-boarding program which includes an induction program 
which incorporates meetings with key Senior Executives.

Company Secretary
The Company has a Company Secretary that is appointed by the 
Board by resolution. 

The Company Secretary is accountable directly to the Board, through 
the Chair.

The role of the Company Secretary is as follows:

 • Advising the Board and Committees on governance matters:

 • Monitoring adherence of Board and Committees to policies and 

procedures.

 • Coordinating timely completion and despatch of Board and 

Committee papers.

Jane Andrews

Sharon Doyle

Pat O’Sullivan

Independent Non-Executive Director

Independent Non-Executive Director

Independent Non-Executive Director

The role of the Committee is to:

 • Ensure the integrity in financial reporting (refer section below – 

Safeguard Integrity in Financial Reporting).

 • Review for accuracy financial statements for each reporting period 

prior to approval by the Board, and publishing.

 • Ensure required declarations from the Company’s Chief Executive 
Officer and Chief Financial Officer are received for each reporting 
period.

 • Ensure that the financial statements for each reporting period 

comply with appropriate accounting standards.

 • Regularly review Accounting Standards and Company Policies in 
conjunction with the Auditors and recommend adoption/changes 
to the Board.

 • Directly follow-up action where considered necessary.

 • Relay any matters of concern to the Board.

 • Oversight of the Company’s group taxation matters and ongoing 

development.

 • Review of taxation governance processes, policies, control 

framework and reporting.

 • Ensure that systems of internal control are functioning effectively 

and economically and that these systems and practices contribute 
to the achievement of the Company’s corporate objectives.

 • Ensure the Internal Audit Function maintains a high standard of 

performance

 • Receive and review reports from the external Auditor.

 • Oversight of the process to ensure the independence and 

competence of the Company’s external auditors.

 • Review the performance of the external auditor on an annual 

basis.

 • Recommend the selection and the appointment of the external 

Auditors, based on specified criteria.

 • Monitor compliance with the requirements of the Corporations 
Act, Listing Rules, Australian and Foreign Taxation Offices and 
other related legal obligations.

 • Make recommendations to the Board on specific risk management 

matters that may relate to industry and regulatory changes.

 • Ensuring business at Board and Committee meeting is accurately 

captured in the minutes.

The number of meetings held during the years and the attendance of 
the members is provided in the Annual Report.

 • Helping to organise and facilitate induction and professional 

development of Directors.

The Audit & Risk Committee Charter is available on the Company’s 
website.

 • Advise and assist the Board in fulfilling its responsibilities relating 
to financial management, risk oversight and reporting functions 
and in safeguarding the Company's assets;

 • Provide a means of easy access to the Board for the external 
auditors in order to assist them in performing their functions; 

 • Assign the Secretary of the Committee such duties and 

responsibilities as the Committee may deem appropriate.

 • Do other things and take other actions as are necessary or 

prudent to fulfil the responsibilities of the Committee, provided 
that no action will be taken without prior approval of the Board.

 • TechnologyOne requires the rotation of the external audit partner 
every five years. The Audit & Risk Committee includes members 
who are financially literate; and at least one member who has 
financial expertise, preferably a qualified accountant.

Remuneration committee
The Board has established a Remuneration Committee. The 
Committee is comprised of:

Name

Position

Jane Andrews (Chair)

Independent Non-Executive Director

Cliff Rosenberg

Ron McLean

Independent Non-Executive Director

Independent Non-Executive Director

The Board has established a Remuneration Committee. The 
Committee is comprised of:

 • To advise the Board with regard to the Company’s broad policy for 

Senior Executive and Director remuneration.

 • To determine, on behalf of the Board, the individual remuneration 

packages for Senior Executives and Directors.

 • To give the Company’s Senior Executives encouragement to 

enhance the Company’s performance and to ensure that they are 
fairly, but responsibly, rewarded for their individual contribution.

The number of meetings held during the years and the attendance of 
the members is provided in the Annual Report.

The Remuneration Committee Charter is available on the Company’s 
website.

Non-Executive Directors’ remuneration is determined by the Board 
within the aggregate amount per annum which may be paid in 
Directors’ fees.

109

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statementsPrinciples of the remuneration 
committee
The committee operates in accordance with the following broad 
principles:

 • The committee should provide the packages needed to attract, 

retain and motivate Senior Executives, but avoid paying more than 
is necessary.

The Nomination & Governance Committee Charter is available on the 
Company’s website

Principles of the Nomination & 
Governance Committee
The committee operates in accordance with the following broad 
principles:

 • The Nomination & Governance Committee is entitled to seek the 

 • The committee should judge where to position the Company 

advice of an external consultant.

relative to other companies.  Be aware of comparable companies’ 
pay, but exercise caution.

 • The committee should be sensitive to the wider scene, especially 

with regard to salary increases.

 • Performance related elements should form a significant proportion 
of the package; should align interests with those of shareholders; 
and should provide keen incentives.

Nomination & Governance 
Committee
The Board has established a Nomination & Governance Committee. 
The Committee is comprised of:

Name

Position

Richard Anstey (Chair)

Independent Non-Executive Director

Sharon Doyle

Jane Andrews

Independent Non-Executive Director

Independent Non-Executive Director

The role of the Committee is as follows:

 • Assessment of the necessary and desirable competencies and 

experience for Board membership.

 • Evaluation of the membership of the Board, Audit & Risk and 

Remuneration committees, and their membership.

 • Evaluation initially and on an on-going basis of Non-Executive 
Director’s professional development, commitments, and their 
ability to commit the necessary time required to fulfil their duties 
to a high standard.

 • Adherence by Directors to the Director’s Code of Conduct and to 

 • The Nomination & Governance Committee will make 

recommendations to the Board. The Board is responsible 
to appoint the most suitable candidate, after receiving 
recommendations from the Nomination & Governance Committee. 
The nominated appointee upon acceptance will hold office until 
the next Annual General Meeting, where the appointee will stand 
for election. 

 • The Board is responsible to either recommend/not recommend 

the endorsement of a Director at the next Annual General 
Meeting.

 • The name of all candidates submitted for election as Director 

is accompanied with necessary information required by 
shareholders to make an informed decision including biographical 
details, competencies, qualifications, details of relationships 
between the Company, the candidate and Directors; other 
directorships held, particulars of other positions held which 
involve significant time commitments, and any other particulars 
required by law or good corporate governance. For existing 
Directors standing for re-election, the number of years as a 
Director of TechnologyOne will also be provided in the Annual 
Report.

 • Directors (with the exception of the Managing Director who is 

appointed by the Board) must stand for re-election every three 
years in accordance with the Company’s Constitution.  One third 
of the Directors retire from office at each Annual General Meeting 
and are eligible to nominate for re-election.

 • A structured process has been established to review and evaluate 
the performance of the Board and its Committees.  This process 
also identifies ways to improve their performance, interaction with 
management, and quality of information provided.

good corporate governance.

The following information is provided in the Annual Report:

 • Review of Board succession plans.

 • The skills, experience and expertise relevant to the position of 

 • Recommendation for changes to committees.

 • Recommendation of, and undertaking the appropriate checks, 

before for the appointment of new Directors.

 • Recommendation of, and undertaking the appropriate checks, for 

Director.

 • The names of Directors considered by the Board to constitute 

independent Directors and the Company’s materiality thresholds.

 • The term of office held by each Director.

the endorsement or non-endorsement of existing Directors.

 • The number of meetings held by the Nomination & Governance 

 • Ensuring that an effective induction process is in place for new 

Board members.

 • Review and oversight of the Company’s Corporate Governance 

Statement and governance related policies.

 • Review and oversight of the Company’s Environmental, Social & 

Governance (ESG) strategy and Sustainability Reporting

 • Oversee compliance with Modern Slavery Regulations

Committee and the names of attendees.

 • Explanation of any departures from the ASX Corporate 

Governance Principles and Recommendations.

Assessment of Director 
Independence
The Board has determined that an independent Director will meet all 
of the following criteria:

The number of meetings held during the years and the attendance of 
the members is provided in the Annual Report.

 • Is not an Executive Director (i.e. not a member of the management 

team) 

 • Is not a substantial shareholder of the Company, as defined by 

 • Responsibilities to the individual.

Section 9 of the Corporations Act, or an officer of a company that 
is a substantial shareholder.

 • Compliance with the codes.

 • Is not directly associated with a substantial shareholder of the 

Company.

 • Within the last three years, has not been employed in an Executive 

capacity by the Company or another group member, or been 
appointed a Director within three years after ceasing to hold such 
employment, insofar as the Director was not appointed prior to the 
introduction of the ASX Principles of Good Corporate Governance 
in March 2003.

 • Within the last three years, has not been a principal of a material 
professional adviser or a material consultant to the Company or 
another group member, or an employee materially associated with 
the service provider.

 • Is not a material supplier or customer of the Company or other 
group member, or an officer of or otherwise associated, either 
directly or indirectly, with a material supplier or customer. This 
includes family members being in these categories.

 • Has no material contractual relationship with the Company or 

another group member other than as a Director of the Company.

 • Is free from any interest and any business or other relationship 
which could, or could reasonably be perceived to, materially 
interfere with the Director’s ability to act in the best interest of the 
Company.

Corporate Governance Principles & 
Recommendations

Ethical Standards and Code of Business Conduct

All Directors, Executives and employees are expected to act with 
the utmost integrity and objectivity, observe the highest standards of 
behaviour and business ethics, and strive at all times to enhance the 
reputation and performance of the Company.

A Code of Business Conduct has been established which is applicable 
to each of the following:

 • Directors

 • Chief Executive Officer

 • Chief Financial Officer

 • Executives

 • Employees

The Codes of Business Conduct has been approved by the Board, 
and given their full support.

The Code addresses:

 • Responsibilities to shareholders, and clients.

 • “The TechnologyOne Way”, which refers to the success of the 
Company coming from our shared values, our entrepreneurial 
spirit and innovation.

 • Employment practices (anti-discrimination, occupational health 

and safety, etc.).

 • Responsibilities to the community.

In addition, the Executive Chair, Chief Executive Officer, Chief Financial 
Officer, Executives and all employees have employment agreements, 
which include job descriptions. These job descriptions describe their 
duties, rights and responsibilities.

In conjunction with the Code of Business Conduct, TechnologyOne 
has developed a Whistleblower Policy and Bribery & Corruption Policy.  
The Whistleblower Policy encourages employees to come forward 
with concerns that the entity is not acting lawfully, ethically or in a 
socially responsible manner and provides suitable protections if they 
do.  The Board will be informed of any material concerns raised that 
call into question the culture of TechnologyOne or have been raised 
under the Bribery & Corruption Policy. 

The Board is informed of any material breaches of the Code of 
Business Conduct by a Director or Senior Executive and of any other 
material breaches of the code that call into question the culture of the 
organisation.

Diversity Policy  
TechnologyOne has an inclusive diversity policy which covers the 
broader dimension of diversity covering aspects of gender, age, 
disability, ethnicity, marital or family status, religious or cultural 
background, sexual orientation and gender orientation within the 
total organisation, including the Board, and senior management.  In 
conjunction with this policy, the Company has measurable objectives 
which are assessed and reported in the annual report.

The diversity of TechnologyOne remains fundamental to our ongoing 
success. TechnologyOne has established a Diversity Policy which 
reflects the Company’s commitment to providing an inclusive 
workplace. 

A summary of the Diversity Policy is following:

 • Diversity is one of TechnologyOne’s strengths. TechnologyOne 

values this diversity and recognises the individual contribution our 
people can make and the opportunity for innovation such diversity 
brings.

 • TechnologyOne believes that we will achieve greater success 
by providing our people with an environment that respects the 
dignity of every individual, fosters trust, and allows every person 
the opportunity to realise their full potential.

 • TechnologyOne is committed to providing an inclusive workplace 
and our commitment to diversity extends to our interactions with 
customer and suppliers.

The Board has developed and has oversight of the following diversity 
objectives:

 • Ensuring compliance with the published diversity policy.

 • Not less than 30% of the Board to be of each gender by 2025 (to 

allow for the Board transition)

 • 70% of all vacant roles are to have at least one female candidate 

shortlisted.

 • Maintain reporting measures that are in compliance with both the 

ASX guidelines and Workplace Gender Equality Agency.

 • Continue to identify employee feedback mechanisms through 

the review of existing forums and information provided as well as 
the identification of appropriate new mechanisms for employee 
consultation. 

111

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements • Maintain existing educational programs that support diversity 

including but not limited to induction, on boarding and leadership 
programs.

The Company’s 2021 Workplace Gender Equality Agency report can 
be found on the ‘Investor Relations’ section of the Company’s website.

TechnologyOne has a history of supporting initiatives aimed at 
promoting the technology sector as a career choice for women.  We 
have continued our support of the Tech Girls Movement, Women in 
Technology and Women in Digital to promote diversity and to be seen 
as an employer of choice for women in the technology industry. We 
also partner with the Computer Society Foundation to sponsor the 
national Big Day In series, which is designed to inspire high school 
and university students to pursue careers in the IT industry.

We have policies in place in relation to anti-discrimination and 
workplace gender equality, diversity, sexual harassment, flexible 
working arrangements and paid parental leave.

Safeguard Integrity In Financial 
Reporting
The Company has established a structure of reviews and 
authorisations designed to ensure the truthful and factual presentation 
of the Company’s financial position. This includes:

 • The establishment of an Audit & Risk Committee, and the review 
and consideration of the accounts by the Audit & Risk Committee.

 • Process to ensure the independence and competence of the 

Company’s external auditors.

 • Requirement that the CEO and CFO state in writing to the Board 
that the Company’s financial reports present a true and fair view 
in all material respects of the Company’s financial condition; 
operational results are in accordance with the relevant accounting 
standards and the Company’s Risk Management and Internal 
Compliance and Control System is operating efficiently and 
effectively in all material respects.

 • Ensuring that the Company’s external Auditor attends the 

Company’s Annual General Meeting each year

 • Verification of statements and data supplied in the annual 

Directors’ report and other corporate reports to ensure that the 
releases to the market are accurate, balanced and understandable 
and provide investors with appropriate information to make 
informed investment decisions.

 • Disclosure of the annual tax transparency statement.

The Company put the external audit services to tender in 2020 which 
is another example of how the Company expresses its dedication to 
ensuring integrity of the financial reporting is maintained.

Continuous disclosure
The Company Secretary working closely with the Executive Chair, 
have been delegated responsibility for the continuous disclosure of 
information to the market, to ensure:

 • All investors have equal and timely access to material information 

concerning the Company, including its financial position, 
performance, ownership and governance.

 • Company announcements are factual and presented in a clear 
and balanced way, requiring the disclosure of both positive and 
negative information.

 • When analysts are briefed on aspects of the Company’s 

operations, the market is forewarned, and the materials used in 

such presentations are also released to the ASX and posted on 
the Company’s website.

 • Any information that a reasonable person would expect to have a 
material effect on the price or value of the Company’s share price 
(as per Listing Rule 3.1) is immediately notified to the ASX.

The Company has established a documented procedure to handle 
continuous disclosure requirements. Directors are provided with 
copies of all announcements made under listing rule 3.1 promptly once 
made

Risk Assessment Management
The Company has adopted an active approach to risk management 
and the Board recognises that the Company’s participation in 
commercial and operational activities require a certain level of risk. 
As such, the Board has delegated the risk management function to 
the management of the Company with oversight by the Board.  A 
standing Item has been included in the Board agenda to consider the 
Enterprise Risk Register.

The Board has received assurance from the Chief Executive Officer 
and Chief Financial Officer that the declaration provided in accordance 
with section 295A of the Corporations Act is founded on a sound 
system of risk management and internal control and that the system is 
operating effectively in all material aspects in relation to the financial 
reporting risks.

The risk appetite of the Company takes into account the level of risk 
and risk combinations that the Board is prepared to take to achieve 
strategic objectives together with the level of risk shock that the 
Company is able to withstand.

The Company has performed an annual risk review and have 
identified a number of key risk categories for the business. 

Human Risk

The Company has identified that it has a material risk in relation to the 
human element of the business. The Company manages human risk 
by undertaking half yearly performance assessments and reviews, 
performance management (where necessary), succession planning, 
key talent retention strategies, having human resources business 
partners assigned to each operating steam of the Company to work 
with the business on any concerns raised, and by conducting half 
yearly surveys of managers to identify any known issues. The Board is 
provided with a summary of these issues as part of the Group Director 
– People & Culture’s report tabled at each board meeting.

Key Risks

The Company’s focus on risk management is primarily conducted 
through the Board, with a number of identified areas of specific risks 
as follows:

Contract Risk

The Company has established a Contract Approval Process that 
reviews all proposed new contracts with non-standard terms prior to 
signing to ensure the contracts can be fulfilled, the risks are known 
and can be managed, and that the contract can be completed 
profitably without exposing the Company to ongoing liabilities.

Financial Risk

The Company has an Executive Committee that reviews the 
Company’s financial exposure with a particular focus in the area of 
Outstanding Debtors. 

Data Security & Privacy Risks

TechnologyOne has successfully completed the Information Security 
Registered Assessors Program (IRAP) assessment for PROTECTED 
classified data.  This provides our SaaS customers with an increased 
cyber security posture and greater certainty in a constantly evolving 
cyber security landscape.  This was achieved by leveraging the strong 
compliance and security foundations established over recent years 
and is a testament to TechnologyOne’s mature security practices, 
accountability mechanisms and belief in continuous assessment and 
improvement.

The Company has a robust data security and privacy program 
developed to meet the requirements set out in Australia’s Privacy 
Amendments (Notifiable Data Breaches) Act 2017, UK Data Protection 
Act 2018 (DPA Act) and the EU General Data Protection Regulation.  
This program ensures security is considered throughout the day to 
day operations of the Company and is backed by an independently 
verified process for dealing promptly with matters should they arise. 
The Company also is certified to the standards required in ISO27000, 
ISO9001, SOC1, SOC2 and SOC3 (Service Organisation Controls).

Software Risk

The Company has an executive R&D Committee that reviews Software 
Release management, including resourcing and development issues.

Insurance Risk

The Board of TechnologyOne, on an annual basis, reviews the 
Company’s insurance requirements and compares this to the level of 
cover provided to ensure it is adequately covered. 

Project Risk

The Board requires the Chief Executive Officer to report on any 
customer implementation project that may be at significant risk of 
either incurring substantial penalties or incurring substantial over-
runs. In addition, the Company has established a Consulting Practice 
Management Team that reviews current projects and consulting 
activities to provide an early detection mechanism to ensure that any 
activities that pose a significant risk to the Company are identified and 
resolved before exposing the Company to potential liabilities.

Sustainability Risk

The Company believes that it does not have material exposure 
to specific economic, environmental, or social sustainability risks 
due to controls implemented. However, the company recognises 
the importance of these to its stakeholders and has developed a 
Sustainability Report to outline the Company’s position and initiatives 
across a number of sustainability risks. 

The Sustainability Report provides the Company’s initiatives and 
targets on items including:

 • Diversity,

 • Customer satisfaction

 • Employee satisfaction

 • Corporate culture

 • Ethical business practices

 • Community support

 • Environmental sustainability practices

The Company has engaged external subject matter experts to 
assist in the preparation of environmental risk reporting aligned 

with the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosure (TCFD) 
recommendations. The Board acknowledges that climate change 
is both an environmental and economic issue.  TCFD disclosures 
are now provided in the Financial Statements and in the annually 
published Sustainability Report.

The Sustainability Report is available on the Company’s website.

Accounting Standards And 
Company Policies
Adhering to Accounting Standards and Company Policies, and the 
appropriate interpretation of such policies/standards, is seen as 
critical to managing the financial risk of Technology One. Accounting 
Standards and Company policies are reviewed on a regular basis by 
the Audit & Risk Committee working in conjunction with the Auditors, 
and recommendations for adoption/change are made to the Board. 
Compliance with Accounting Standards and Company policies are 
included as part of the Auditors annual review.

Internal Controls and Compliance

The Company has an internal control framework that consists of:

 • Written policies and procedures.

 • Division of responsibilities to ensure appropriate segregation of 

duties.

 • Careful selection of high calibre well qualified staff.

TechnologyOne undertakes Internal Audits in accordance with the 
Internal Audit schedule as approved by the Audit & Risk Committee.  
These audits are undertaken by the Governance, Risk & Compliance 
Team and reported directly through to the Audit & Risk Committee. 
Independent auditors are engaged to review the Company’s internal 
controls and compliance and to provide a report to the Audit & Risk 
Committee. The Audit & Risk Committee oversees the Company’s 
compliance program with relevant international standards (including 
ISO 9001, 27000 series, SOC 1, 2 & 3).

The Company has established Practice Management teams in each 
business area to undertake reviews of compliance with certain 
operational policies and procedures.  Each Practice Management 
Team provides quarterly reporting of their findings to the Audit & 
Risk Committee.  An independent audit of the Practice Management 
reviews is undertaken by the Internal Audit team annually. 

Remuneration Principles
TechnologyOne believes in the full disclosure of remuneration of its 
Directors and Executives to the market, on at least an annual basis. 
Disclosure will include all monetary and non-monetary remuneration 
including salary, fees, non-cash benefits, bonuses or profit share 
accruing each year irrespective of payment, superannuation 
contributions, entitlements at termination or retirement, value of 
shares or options issued and sign-on payments.

As a matter of principle, TechnologyOne has adopted the following 
guidelines to motivate Directors and Executives to pursue long-term 
growth, and ensure their interests and those of the shareholders are 
closely aligned:

 • Remuneration packages should be set in the context of what is 

reasonable and fair, taking into account the Company’s legal and 
industrial obligations, labour market conditions, the scale of the 
business and competitive forces.

 • Non-Executive Directors should be remunerated solely on the 
basis of a cash payment, plus superannuation contributions as 
required by law. Non-Executive Directors should not be provided 

113

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statementswith bonuses, options, shares, loans or any other non-cash 
component. They should not participate in schemes designed for 
the remuneration of Executives. The Company does not provide a 
Director’s Retirement Plan.

 • Non-Executive Directors will not be provided termination or 
retirement payments other than statutory superannuation.

 • Company Executives (including Executive Directors) should be 
provided with a significant component of their expected salary 
on “an at-risk basis”, tied to the Company’s profit target. Shares, 
Options or Performance Rights may also be provided as part of 
the “at risk component”, but these must be tied to performance 
hurdles. The performance hurdles are to be reasonable, objective 
and measurable.  Vesting of securities is also subject to malus and 
clawback provisions.

 • Termination payments should be agreed in writing and in advance 

if any are to be provided.

Performance Evaluation Board
The Board meets annually for the purpose of reviewing and 
evaluating the performance of the Board as a whole, each Committee, 
key Executives and each Director individually in meeting key 
responsibilities and achieving its objectives. 

The following areas were considered by the Board in its 2021 annual 
review:

 • Performance evaluation of Directors and Senior Executives.

 • Review of skills and experience of the Board for current 

operations of the Company and identification of any shortfalls.

 • Director succession planning.

 • Review of current legislation in relation to any age restrictions. 

 • Review of independence of each Director.

 • Review of skills matrix to ensure relevance of required skills.

To assist the Board in maximising its effectiveness, the Board and 
Nomination & Governance Committee have a skills matrix to provide 
objective information about each Director and the Board as a whole 
during the past year. 

Each Director is encouraged to discuss any issue concerning Board 
performance with the Chair at any time.

Directors are encouraged to maintain and improve their knowledge, 
skills and expertise through briefings, seminars and going professional 
development programs.

Remuneration of the Board is assessed every three (3) years against 
comparative data for Australian publicly listed companies supplied 
by an independent consultant and reported to the Remuneration 
Committee. The relative risk, time, effort, complexity of the 
underlying business, competency of the management team, financial 
performance and track record, clarity of strategy as well as the number 
of Board meeting required to oversee the business are used as 
benchmarks to determine the appropriate level of Director’s fees. For 
years where a formal assessment of remuneration is not conducted, 
the Director’s fees are increased by the Australian Consumer Price 
Index (CPI).

Senior Executives 

The performance of Senior Executives is reviewed and evaluated 
annually by a combination of the Company’s internal performance 

management program managed by the Company’s human resources 
department and as part of the formal remuneration review that is 
conducted annually by the Remuneration Committee.

Trading in Company Securities
The Directors have resolved to adopt the following policy in relation to 
trading by Directors and Officers in the Company’s shares.

 • The Directors and Senior Executives will not engage in short term 

trading of the Company’s shares.

 • The Directors and Senior Executives will not buy or sell shares 
at a time when they possess information which, if disclosed 
publicly, would be likely to materially affect the market price of the 
Company’s shares. Information is not considered to be generally 
available until a reasonable time has elapsed to allow the market 
to absorb these announcements.

The Directors and Senior Executives are not permitted to use the 
Company’s shares as security for margin loans. To assist Directors 
and Senior Executives in abiding by these principles the following 
rules have been established, relating to when Directors and Senior 
Executives can buy and sell the Company’s shares:

For 50 days from the day following the release of the following 
information to the market:

 • the half yearly financial statement

 • the annual financial statement

 • other reports relating to the financial performance or financial 

status of the Company. 

At all times, the Director or Senior Executive must notify the Board 
(as a minimum the Chair) in advance of any intended transactions 
involving the Company’s shares. It is recognised that there may be 
circumstances where it may not be appropriate for Directors and 
Senior Executives to buy and sell within the above 50-day window 
in the event the Company is involved in strategic initiatives (such as 
acquisitions), which could materially affect the market price of the 
Company’s shares.

The Directors and Senior Executives must advise the Company 
Secretary of any completed trades immediately once each transaction 
is done. This will allow the Company Secretary sufficient time to notify 
the ASX of the change in shareholding within the required period.

A register of Director’s holdings is made available for inspection at 
every Board meeting 

This policy applies to Directors and Senior Executives (including their 
nominee companies) and the entities which they control.

For the purpose of this Policy, Senior Executive is deemed to include 
the following parties:

a) persons named by the Executive Chair from time to time who may 

be involved in strategic issues

b) persons named by the Executive Chair from time to time who are 

involved in financial reporting

c) Senior Executives of the Company as defined as Officers in 

section 9 of the Corporations Act being: ‘any person by whatever 
name called who is concerned or takes part in the management of 
the Company’.

In addition to the policy for Directors and Senior Executives, all 
employees are reminded of the Insider Trading provisions of the 
Corporations Act. Staff are reminded of their obligations during the 
Trading Windows. 

Shareholders’ Rights And 
Communication
The Board of Directors aim to ensure that shareholders are informed 
of all major developments affecting the Company’s state of affairs. The 
information is communicated to shareholders, and forms part of the 
Company’s two-way investor relations program:

 • By ensuring that all shareholders can elect to receive information 
and communications from the Company’s share registry either 
physically or electronically and can update their preferences 
through the share registry.

 • By the Annual Report being distributed to all shareholders. The 

Board ensures the Annual Report contains all relevant information 
about the operations of the Company during the financial year, 
together with details of future developments and other disclosures 
required under the Corporations Act 2001.

 • By publishing its Notice of Meetings and Explanatory 

Memorandum for each Annual General Meeting or other 
such meetings as required from time to time; By encouraging 
shareholders to attend and participate in the Company’s Annual 
General Meeting;

 • By encouraging shareholder to attend and participate in the 

Company’s Annual General Meeting.

 • By encouraging shareholders to participate in proxy voting should 
they be unable to attend the Company’s Annual General Meeting. 

 • By enabling shareholders to pose questions to the Company in 

the lead up to the Annual General Meeting for responding during 
the meeting;

 • By the Half Year results released to the market;

 • By disclosures forwarded to the ASX under the Company’s 

continuous disclosure obligations;

 • Through the Company’s website, under a special area called 

Investor Relations;

 • By the Company’s participation in scheduled briefings with 

institutional shareholders and security analysts;

 • By the participation of the Company’s Auditors and Solicitors at 

the Annual General Meeting.

All information communicated by the Company is in accordance with 
its continuous disclosure requirements under ASX Listing Rule 3.1.

Non-Compliance with ASX 
Corporate Governance Principles & 
Recommendations 4th Edition

The Board of Technology One believes in working to the highest 
standards of Corporate Governance. Notwithstanding this, the Board 
believes it is important to recognise there is not a ‘one size fits all’ to 
good corporate governance, and that it is important to consider the 
size of the Company, the industry it operates within, the corporate 
history and the Company’s inherent strengths. 

The ASX Corporate Governance Council has recognised this fact and 
has allowed companies to explain where they do not comply with the 
Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations 4th Edition.

The Company has complied with the majority of recommendations, 
with the exception of the following. The Board believes the area of 
non-conformance shown below will not impact the Company’s ability 
to meet the highest standards of Corporate Governance and will at the 
same time allow the Company to capitalize on its inherent strengths.

This section highlights the area of non-compliance and explains why it 
is appropriate.

Independent Chair (Refer 
ASX Corporate Guidelines – 
Recommendation 2.5)
The Board is of the opinion it should maximise the vision, skills and 
deep industry knowledge of the Company’s founder and major 
shareholder, Mr Di Marco, to continue to lead the Company forward. 
He has a long and proven track record of creating significant 
shareholder wealth for the Company as its Chair, since listing on the 
ASX in 1999.

The Board believes Mr Di Marco continues to be the best candidate 
to clearly communicate the Company’s vision, strategy and to set 
market expectations. To this end it is seen as appropriate that Mr Di 
Marco should remain as Executive Chair of the Company. There is no 
empirical evidence to support the preference of an Independent Chair. 

The ASX Corporate Governance Principles and Recommendations 
propose that “if the Chair is not an independent Director, a listed entity 
should consider the appointment of an independent director as the 
Deputy Chair”.  Mr Pat O’Sullivan was appointed Deputy Chair and 
Lead Independent Director from his appointment to the Board on 2 
March 2021. 

On 23 May 2017, Mr Edward Chung was appointed as Chief Executive 
Officer.  

Mr Di Marco is not deemed an independent under the ASX guidelines 
due to him being a substantial shareholder. This, however, aligns Mr Di 
Marco with the interests of the Company’s shareholders.

115

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statementsVoluntary Tax Transparency Report

TechnologyOne has a strong commitment to transparency and 
compliance.  TechnologyOne supports the objectives of the 
Government and the Board of Taxation to provide stakeholders with 
additional information and confidence that a company is compliant 
with their statutory obligations. 

Our Approach to Tax 
TechnologyOne has a tax governance framework which has been 
approved by the Board. Tax falls under the oversight of the Audit  
and Risk Committee.   

The information provided complies with the standard of disclosure 
expected of ‘large businesses’ under the Voluntary Tax Transparency 
Code.  

The requirements of the Code are broken into Part A, which forms part 
of the tax notes as referenced below and Part B as disclosed below.  
The make-up of the respective parts is as follows:

(i) Part A:

 • Effective company tax rates for our Australian and global 

operations (Note 7). The effective tax rate of the Australian  
Group for FY21 is 25.7%

 • A reconciliation of accounting profit to tax expense and to income 

tax payable (Note 7)

 • Identification of material temporary and non-temporary differences 

(Note 7)

(ii) Part B

 • Tax policy, tax strategy and governance 

 • Information about international related party dealings 

 • A tax contribution summary of income tax paid.

Information in relation to the year ended 30 September 2021 is set out 
below.   

Tax is one of a broad range of commercial factors taken into account 
when assessing and undertaking investment activities.  

TechnologyOne is conservative in its approach to tax risk. 
TechnologyOne aims to achieve full compliance with tax obligations 
in each tax jurisdiction in which it operates. In accordance with its 
commitment to best practice corporate governance and a culture of 
excellence, TechnologyOne will not enter into any arrangements that 
may be regarded as tax evasion. 

The Tax Risk Governance Policy includes a framework for the internal 
escalation process for referring matters to the CFO. The CFO must 
report any material tax issues to the Board. TechnologyOne will not 
pursue aggressive tax positions or strategies or adopt positions that 
are not able to be supported or defended in a court of law. Where the 
tax law is unclear or subject to interpretation, advice is obtained and 
when necessary the Australian Taxation Office (ATO) (or other relevant 
tax authority) is consulted to ensure certainty. 

TechnologyOne has a strong history of compliance and an open 
engagement with relevant tax authorities. We seek to be co-operative 
and transparent and to maintain collaborative relationships. 

Year ended 30 September 2021

Corporate income taxes

Fringe benefits taxes

Payroll taxes

Net GST/VAT tax

Employee taxes remitted

TOTAL

Consolidated Global 
Group AUD

7,188,927.18

425,130.46

7,397,936.67

29,969,082.36

49,862,713.88

94,843,790.55

International related party dealings 
TechnologyOne seeks to ensure all intercompany transactions are 
undertaken in accordance with the arm’s length principle.  

TechnologyOne has entered an Advanced Pricing Arrangements  
(APA) with the Australian Taxation Office. 

As an Australian headquartered company, we have created and 
maintained significant intellectual property in Australia which has  
been successfully utilised in our overseas operations. Our 
engagement with the ATO through the APA process, seeks to  
ensure Australia receives a commercial return for the use of 
intellectual property by our overseas businesses. These returns  
are taxable in Australia. 

In addition, loans are made to and received from foreign controlled 
entities for short term, medium term and long-term funding 
requirements. As a large global group, these transactions assist with 
managing cash flow and funding requirements.  

Tax Contribution Summary
Below is a summary of the taxes paid, collected and remitted by 
TechnologyOne to the relevant revenue authorities during the 
financial year ended 30 September 2021.

117

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statementsFinancial Statements
Consolidated income statement

For the year ended 30 September 2021

Revenue - SaaS and continuing business

Revenue - Legacy licence business

Revenue from contracts with customers

Variable costs

Variable customer SaaS costs

Total variable costs

 Occupancy costs 

 Corporate costs 

 Depreciation and amortisation 

 Computer and communication costs 

 Marketing costs 

 Employee costs 

 Share-based payments 

 Finance expense 

 Total operating costs 

Other income

Profit before income tax

Income tax expense

Profit for the year

 Basic earnings per share 

 Diluted earnings per share 

Notes

5

6

6

6

6

6

5(a)

7

32

32

The above consolidated income statement should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

For the year ended 30 September 2021

Profit for the year (from above)

Other comprehensive income

Items that may be reclassified to profit or loss 
Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations

Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax

Total comprehensive income for the year

2021
$’000

293,553

17,742

311,295

(19,444)

(21,934)

(41,378)

(1,942)

(13,190)

(25,832)

(8,850)

(7,890)

(110,381)

(3,213)

(1,493)

2020
$’000

269,774

28,493

298,267

(19,130)

(19,479)

(38,609)

(3,259)

(18,312)

(18,638)

(8,019)

(5,296)

(119,615)

(3,305)

(1,495)

(172,791)

(177,939)

717

97,843

(25,152)

72,691

751

82,470

(19,525)

62,945

 Cents 

 Cents 

                22.64 

                19.75 

                22.52 

                19.61 

2021
$’000

72,691

(178)

(178)

72,513

2020
$’000

62,945

286

286

63,231

The above consolidated statement of comprehensive income should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.

Consolidated statement of financial position 
as at 30 September 2021

Notes

ASSETS

Current assets

Cash and cash equivalents

Prepayments

Trade and other receivables

Contract assets

Other current assets

Current tax assets

Contract acquisition costs

Total current assets

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment

Right-of-use assets

Intangible assets

Capitalised development

Deferred tax assets

Contract assets

Contract acquisition costs

Total non-current assets

Total assets

LIABILITIES

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Provisions

Contingent consideration

Deferred revenue

Current tax liabilities

Lease liability

Total current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Provisions

Contingent consideration

Other non-current liabilities

Lease liability

Total non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

EQUITY

Contributed equity

Other reserves

Retained Earnings

Total equity

8

9

10

11

13

12

20

13

13

14

10

13

15

17

18

16

20

19

18

20

22

23

2020
$’000

142,853

13,429

50,580

22,709

238

-

5,001

234,810

7,279

20,971

61,696

90,985

26,349

2,962

9,676

219,918

454,728

36,567

21,219

3,842

160,015

2,677

3,342

227,662

2,067

7,576

120

27,069

36,832

264,494

190,234

51,645

72,717

65,872

190,234

2019
$’000

125,244

10,851

37,396

22,051

397

8,077

2,956

206,972

8,969

23,786

37,986

62,556

28,605

-

7,035

168,937

375,909

37,123

20,548

-

144,148

-

2,148

203,967

2,430

-

147

27,197

29,774

233,741

142,168

40,551

63,524

38,093

142,168

The above consolidated statement of financial position should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.

119

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of changes in equity 

For the year ended 30 September 2021

Consolidated statement of cash flows

For the year ended 30 September 2021

Balance at 1 October 2020

Profit for the period

Exchange differences on translation of reserves

Total comprehensive income for the period

Dividends Paid

Transfer to dividends reserve

Exercise of share options

Share based payments

Tax impact of share trust

Balance at 30 September 2021

Balance at 1 October 2019

AASB 16 opening adjustment

Adjusted opening balance

Profit for the period

Exchange differences on translation of reserves

Total comprehensive income for the period

Dividends paid

Transfer to dividends reserve

Exercise of share options

Share-based payments

Tax impact of share trust

Balance at 30 September 2020

Notes

Contributed 
equity
$’000

40,551

24

22

33

24

22

33

-

-

-

-

-

11,094

-

-

11,094

51,645

35,302

-

35,302

-

-

-

-

-

5,249

-

-

5,249

40,551

Retained  
earnings
$’000

38,093

72,691

-

72,691

Dividend reserve
$’000

30,046

-

-

-

-

(42,504)

(44,912)

44,912

-

-

-

(44,912)

65,872

16,078

199

16,277

62,945

-

62,945

-

-

-

2,408

32,454

27,905

-

27,905

-

-

-

-

(38,988)

(41,129)

41,129

-

-

-

-

-

-

(41,129)

38,093

2,141

30,046

FOREX  
reserve
$’000

Share option 
reserve
$’000

Total  
equity
$’000

2,136

-

(178)

(178)

-

-

-

-

-

-

31,342

142,168

-

-

-

-

-

-

3,213

3,750

6,963

72,691

(178)

72,513

(42,504)

-

11,094

3,213

3,750

(24,447)

1,958

38,305

190,234

25,722

106,857

-

199

25,722

107,056

1,850

-

1,850

-

286

286

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

3,305

2,315

5,620

62,945

286

63,231

(38,988)

-

5,249

3,305

2,315

(28,119)

142,168

The above consolidated statement of changes in equity should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.

2,136

31,342

Cash flows from operating activities

Receipts from customers (inclusive of GST)

Payments to suppliers and employees (inclusive of GST)

Interest received

Net Income taxes paid

Interest paid

Net cash inflow / (outflow) from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities

Payment for business acquisition

Payments for property, plant and equipment

Payments for development expenditures and intangibles

Net cash inflow / (outflow) from investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities

Proceeds from exercise of share options

Principal repayments of lease liabilities

Dividends paid to shareholders

Net cash inflow / (outflow) from financing activities

Net increase / (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the financial year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

Notes

20

31

20

24

8

2021
$’000

341,812

(217,795)

225

(7,762)

(1,493)

114,987

(11,585)

(1,658)

(51,269)

(64,512)

10,595

(957)

(42,504)

(32,866)

17,609

125,244

142,853

2020
$’000

340,405

(222,036)

353

(13,716)

(1,495)

103,511

(223)

(1,979)

(42,859)

(45,061)

5,248

(4,512)

(38,988)

(38,252)

20,198

105,046

125,244

The above consolidated statement of cash flows should be read in conjunction with the accompanying notes.

121

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements

1. 

Summary of significant  
accounting policies

The financial report of Technology One Limited (the Company) for 
the year ended 30 September 2021 was authorised for issue in 
accordance with a resolution of Directors on 23 November 2021.

Technology One Limited (the Company) is a company limited by 
shares incorporated in Australia whose shares are publicly traded on 
the Australian Securities Exchange.

The principal accounting policies adopted in the preparation of these 
financial statements are set out below. These policies have been 
consistently applied to all the periods presented, unless otherwise 
stated. The financial statements are for the consolidated entity 
consisting of Technology One Limited and its subsidiaries. The nature 
of the operations and principal activities of the Group are described in 
the Directors' report.

(a) Basis of preparation

The financial report is a general-purpose financial report prepared by 
a for profit entity, which has been prepared in accordance with the 
requirements of the Corporations Act 2001, Australian Accounting 
Standards and other authoritative pronouncements of the Australian 
Accounting Standards Board.

The financial report is presented in Australian dollars and all values 
are rounded to the nearest thousand dollars ($000) unless otherwise 
stated.

The accounting policies adopted are consistent with those of the 
previous financial year except where a change has been required due 
to the implementation of a new accounting standard.

Certain comparative items have been reclassified in the financial 
statements to align with the 30 September 2021 year end disclosures.  

(i) Compliance with IFRS

This financial report also complies with International Financial 
Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the International Accounting 
Standards Board.

(ii) New accounting standards and interpretations

The accounting policies adopted are consistent with those of the 
previous financial year. Any new or amended standards that became 
applicable for the first time for the 30 September 2021 year end did 
not result in a change to the Group’s accounting policies or require 
retrospective adjustments.

(i)  Issued but not yet effective  

No new standards that will have a material impact to the Group 
have been issued that are not in effect for the Group.

(ii) Critical accounting estimates  

The preparation of financial statements requires the use 
of certain critical accounting estimates. It also requires 
management to exercise its judgement in the process of 
applying the Group's accounting policies. The areas involving 
a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where 
assumptions and estimates are significant to the financial 
statements, are disclosed in note 3.

(b) Principles of consolidation

(i) Subsidiaries

The consolidated financial statements incorporate the assets and 
liabilities of all subsidiaries of Technology One Limited ('Company' 
or 'parent entity') as at 30 September 2021 and the results of all 
subsidiaries for the year then ended. Technology One Limited and 
its subsidiaries together are referred to in this financial report as the 
'Group' or the 'Consolidated entity'. 

Intercompany transactions, balances and unrealised gains on 
transactions between companies are eliminated. Unrealised losses 
are also eliminated unless the transaction provides evidence 
of the impairment of the asset transferred. Accounting policies 
of subsidiaries have been changed where necessary to ensure 
consistency with the policies adopted by the Group.

(ii) Employee Share Trust

The Group has formed a trust to administer the Group's employee 
share scheme. This trust is consolidated, as the substance of 
the relationship is that the trust is controlled by the Group. At 30 
September 2021, the Group had 66,897 treasury shares (2020: 61,173). 

Treasury shares are shares in the Group that are held by the 
Employee Share Trust for the purpose of issuing shares under the 
TechnologyOne employee share scheme. 

(iii) Business combination and goodwill

Business combinations are accounted for using the acquisition 
method under AASB 3 Business Combinations. The cost of an 
acquisition is measured as the aggregate of the consideration 
transferred, which is measured at acquisition date fair value, and the 
amount of any non-controlling interests in the acquiree. 

For each business combination, the Group elects whether to 
measure the non-controlling interests in the acquiree at fair value or 
at the proportionate share of the acquiree’s identifiable net assets. 
Acquisition-related costs are expensed as incurred and included in 
administrative expenses. 

When the Group acquires a business, it assesses the financial assets 
and liabilities assumed for appropriate classification and designation 
in accordance with the contractual terms, economic circumstances 
and pertinent conditions as at the acquisition date. This includes the 
separation of embedded derivatives in host contracts by the acquiree.

Any contingent consideration to be transferred by the acquirer 
will be recognised at fair value at the acquisition date. Contingent 
consideration classified as equity is not remeasured and its 
subsequent settlement is accounted for within equity. Contingent 
consideration classified as an asset or liability that is a financial 
instrument and within the scope of AASB 9 Financial Instruments, 
is measured at fair value with the changes in fair value recognised 
in the statement of profit or loss in accordance with AASB 9. Other 
contingent consideration that is not within the scope of AASB 9 is 
measured at fair value at each reporting date with changes in fair 
value recognised in profit or loss. 

Goodwill is initially measured at cost (being the excess of the 
aggregate of the consideration transferred and the amount 
recognised for non-controlling interests and any previous interest held 
over the net identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed). 

If the fair value of the net assets acquired is in excess of the aggregate 
consideration transferred, the Group re-assesses whether it has 
correctly identified all of the assets acquired and all of the liabilities 
assumed and reviews the procedures used to measure the amounts 
to be recognised at the acquisition date. If the reassessment still 
results in an excess of the fair value of net assets acquired over the 
aggregate consideration transferred, then the gain is recognised in 
profit or loss. After initial recognition, goodwill is measured at cost less 
any accumulated impairment losses. 

For the purpose of impairment testing, goodwill acquired in a business 
combination is, from the acquisition date, allocated to each of the 
Group’s cash-generating units that are expected to benefit from the 
combination, irrespective of whether other assets or liabilities of 
the acquiree are assigned to those units. Where goodwill has been 
allocated to a cash-generating unit (CGU) and part of the operation 
within that unit is disposed of, the goodwill associated with the 
disposed operation is included in the carrying amount of the operation 
when determining the gain or loss on disposal. Goodwill disposed 
in these circumstances is measured based on the relative values of 
the disposed operation and the portion of the cash-generating unit 
retained.

(c) Foreign currency translation

(i) Functional and presentation currency

Items included in the financial statements of each of the Group's 
operations are measured using the currency of the primary economic 
environment in which the entity operates ('the functional currency'). 
The consolidated financial statements are presented in Australian 
dollars, which is Technology One Limited's functional and presentation 
currency.

(ii) Transactions and balances

Foreign currency transactions are translated into the functional 
currency using the exchange rates prevailing at the dates of the 
transactions. Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the 
settlement of such transactions and from the translation at year end 
exchange rates of monetary assets and liabilities denominated in 
foreign currencies are recognised in the income statement.

(iii) Group companies

The results and financial position of foreign operations (none of 
which has the currency of a hyperinflationary economy) that have 
a functional currency different from the presentation currency are 
translated into the presentation currency as follows:

 • Assets and liabilities for each statement of financial position 

presented are translated at the closing rate at the date of that 
statement of financial position

 • Income and expenses for each income statement and statement 
of comprehensive income are translated at average exchange 
rates (unless this is not a reasonable approximation of the 
cumulative effect of the rates prevailing on the transaction dates, 
in which case income and expenses are translated at the dates  
of the transactions)

 • All resulting exchange differences are recognised in other 

comprehensive income.

(d) 

Revenue recognition

The Group has the following key revenue categories:

1.  SaaS Fees

2. Annual Licence Fees

3. Consulting Services

4. Initial Licence Fees

The accounting policies for each of these categories has been set  
out below: 

Revenue categories

1. 

SaaS Fees

Revenue from term SaaS contracts are recognised on a daily basis 
over the term of the contract. Included within this category is revenue 
from contracts for annual SaaS licences as well as Platform services 
associated with initial licence fees. The Group considers that SaaS 
licence contracts represent a right to access the Group’s licenced 
intellectual property and as such the performance obligation is fulfilled 
over the contract term. 

Payment terms in respect of SaaS Fees are typically annual within 14 
to 30 days of invoice. Invoiced amounts are reflected in trade and 
other receivables until paid. 

Unsatisfied performance obligations in respect of SaaS Fees received 
or receivable are recognised as deferred revenue in the consolidated 
statement of financial position. Refer to note 16 for details of deferred 
revenue. 

Costs incurred in obtaining the customer contract are expensed, 
unless they are incremental to obtaining the contract and the 
Group expects to recover those costs. Costs that meet the criteria 
for capitalisation will be amortised over the life of the contract that 
they relate to. The Group has identified certain commission costs as 
meeting the criteria of directly related contract costs. These costs are 
capitalised in the month in which they are incurred and amortised 
over an average contract term of 5 years. The movement in the year 
and the closing balance of this asset is disclosed within note 13 as 
‘contract acquisition costs’. This balance is presented as ‘contract 
acquisition costs’ in the statement of financial position. 

2.  Annual Licence Fees

Revenue from Annual Licence Fees are recognised on a daily 
basis over the term of the contract. The Group considers that the 
performance obligation in respect of these services is satisfied over 
time.

Payment terms in respect of Annual Licence Fees are typically annual 
within 14 to 30 days of invoice. Invoiced amounts are reflected in trade 
and other receivables until paid.

Unsatisfied performance obligations in respect of Annual Licence 
Fees are disclosed as deferred revenue in the consolidated statement 
of financial position. Refer to note 16 for details of deferred revenue. 

3.  Consulting Services

Consulting services includes services for licenced software and 
project services revenue.

Revenue from these services is recognised as services are rendered, 
typically in accordance with the achievement of contract milestones 
and/or hours expended.

123

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
 
4. 

Initial licence fees

Initial Licence Fees includes both perpetual licence fees and 
subscription term licences and are recognised on provision of the 
software. The Group considers that such contracts represent a right 
to use the Group’s licenced intellectual property and as such the 
performance obligation is fulfilled at the point in time at which the 
customer receives the licence key.

Payment terms in respect of Initial Licence Fees are typically within 
14 to 30 days of invoice. Invoiced amounts are reflected in trade and 
other receivables.

Perpetual licence fees are typically invoiced upfront on signing the 
contract but subscription term licences are billed annually throughout 
the subscription period. 

As the performance obligation is satisfied at a point in time (i.e. at 
contract delivery), there are no unsatisfied performance obligations  
in respect of Initial Licence Fees.

The Group considers the effects of variable consideration, reviews 
the contracts to identify if a significant financing component exists 
and considers the standalone pricing of the initial licence fees when 
allocating the transaction price of the contract to the performance 
obligation.

Associated contract balances

Under AASB 15, the timing of revenue recognition, customer invoicing 
and cash collections results in the recognition of trade and other 
receivables, contract asset and deferred revenue (contract liability) 
on the Group’s Consolidated statement of financial position. At 30 
September 2021, the statement of financial position shows a current 
liability balance of $228m (30 September 2020: $204m) which 
is largely attributable to the deferred revenue balance in current 
liabilities. As deferred revenue represents payments received or 
receivable in advance from customers for SaaS Fees and Annual 
Licence Fees which will be recognised in future periods, and not a 
future cash outflow, this balance does not impact the Group’s ability  
to meet its short-term obligations as and when they fall due.

Revenue Groups disclosed in the consolidated income statement

The Group has the following revenue groups:

1. 

Revenue – SaaS and continuing business

The Group defines continuing business as those revenue streams 
that form part of the growth strategy. Namely this includes SaaS, 
Annual Licence Fees and consulting services. 

2.  Revenue – Legacy licence business

The legacy licence fee business encompasses the sale of initial 
licences which will continue to decline as our customers transition 
to SaaS, growing the SaaS and continuing business revenue. 
Included within this revenue group is Annual Licence Fees 
recognised from the date the associated initial licence is delivered 
until the end of the first financial year post signing.

(e) 

Income tax

The income tax expense or benefit for the period is the tax payable 
on the current period's taxable income based on the applicable 
income tax rate for each jurisdiction adjusted by changes in deferred 
tax assets and liabilities attributable to temporary differences and to 
unused tax losses.

The current income tax charge is calculated on the basis of the tax 
laws enacted or substantively enacted at the end of the reporting 

period in the countries where the Group's subsidiaries operate 
and generate taxable income. Management periodically evaluates 
positions taken in tax returns with respect to situations in which 
applicable tax regulation is subject to interpretation. It establishes 
provisions where appropriate on the basis of amounts expected to be 
paid to the tax authorities.

Deferred income tax is provided in full, using the liability method, on 
temporary differences arising between the tax bases of assets and 
liabilities and their carrying amounts in the consolidated financial 
statements. However, the deferred income tax is not accounted for if 
it arises from initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction 
other than a business combination that at the time of the transaction 
affects neither accounting nor taxable profit or loss. Deferred income 
tax is determined using tax rates (and laws) that have been enacted 
or substantially enacted by the end of the reporting period and are 
expected to apply when the related deferred income tax asset is 
realised or the deferred income tax liability is settled.

Deferred tax assets are recognised for deductible temporary 
differences and unused tax losses only if it is probable that future 
taxable amounts will be available to utilise those temporary 
differences and losses.

Deferred tax liabilities and assets are not recognised for temporary 
differences between the carrying amount and tax bases of 
investments in foreign operations where the Group is able to control 
the timing of the reversal of the temporary differences and it is 
probable that the differences will not reverse in the foreseeable future.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally 
enforceable right to offset current tax assets and liabilities and when 
the deferred tax balances relate to the same taxation authority. 
Current tax assets and tax liabilities are offset where the entity has a 
legally enforceable right to offset and intends either to settle on a net 
basis, or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously.

The carrying amount of deferred income tax assets is reviewed at 
each reporting date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer 
probable that sufficient taxable profit will be available to allow all or 
part of the deferred income tax asset to be utilised.

Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are measured at the tax 
rates that are expected to apply to the year when the asset is realised 
or the liability is settled, based on tax rates (and tax laws) that have 
been enacted or substantively enacted at the reporting date.

Technology One Limited and its wholly-owned Australian controlled 
entities have implemented the tax consolidation legislation. As a 
consequence, these entities are taxed as a single entity and the 
deferred tax assets and liabilities of these entities are set off in the 
consolidated financial statements.

The head entity, Technology One Limited, and the controlled entities in 
the tax consolidated group account for their own current and deferred 
tax amounts. These tax amounts are measured as if each entity in the 
tax consolidated group continues to be a stand-alone taxpayer in its 
own right.

The Group has applied the Group allocation approach in determining 
the appropriate amount of current taxes and deferred taxes to allocate 
to members of the tax consolidated group. The current and deferred 
tax amounts are measured in a systematic manner that is consistent 
with the broad principles in AASB 112.

The Group created an Employee Share Trust during 2009 which 
allows an employee on the exercise of an option to hold the share 
in the Trust. As per AASB 112, on granting the option, the Group now 
records a deferred tax asset on the expected value of the share. 

If the amount of the tax deduction (or estimated future tax deduction) 
exceeds the amount of the related cumulative remuneration expense, 
the difference is recognised directly in equity. When the employee 
exercises the option, the tax effect difference between the actual 
market value and what was recorded as a deferred tax asset is 
recognised in equity.

AASB Interpretation 23 Uncertainty over Income Tax Treatments 
clarifies how to recognise and measure deferred and current income 
tax assets and liabilities where there is uncertainty over a tax 
treatment. This does not have a material impact on the Group.

(f) 

Segment reporting

An operating segment is a component of an entity that engages 
in business activities from which it may earn revenues and incur 
expenses (including revenues and expenses relating to transactions 
with other components of the same entity), whose operating results 
are regularly reviewed by the entity's chief operating decision maker 
to make decisions about resources to be allocated to the segment and 
assess its performance and for which discrete financial information is 
available.

Operating segments have been identified based on the information 
provided to the chief operating decision maker - being the Chief 
Executive Officer.

Operating segments that meet the quantitative criteria as prescribed 
by AASB 8 are reported separately. However, an operating segment 
that does not meet the quantitative criteria is still reported separately 
where information about the segment would be useful to users of the 
financial statements.

(g) 

Leases

AASB 16 Leases sets out the principles for the recognition, 
measurement, presentation and disclosure of leases and requires 
lessees to recognise most leases on the balance sheet.

The Group’s lease portfolio primarily consists of property leases. 
Lease terms are negotiated on an individual basis and contain a range 
of different terms and conditions. 

Lease contracts may contain both lease and non-lease components. 
The Group allocates the consideration in the contract to the lease and 
non-lease components based on their relative stand-alone prices. 

Lease liability

The lease liability is initially measured at the present value of 
outstanding lease payments (including those to be made under 
reasonably certain extension options). The payments used in this 
calculation include the following:

The lease payments above are discounted using the interest rate 
implicit in the lease if that rate is readily determinable. This is not the 
case for the Group’s current leases. When the interest rate implicit in 
the lease is not readily determinable AASB 16 requires the use of the 
incremental borrowing rate to calculate the present value of the lease 
payments. This rate is the rate of interest that a lessee would have to 
pay to borrow the funds necessary to purchase the right of use asset, 
over a similar term and with a similar security, in similar economic 
environment.

The most appropriate rate to use as a starting point in determining 
the incremental borrowing rate would be the interest rate incurred on 
existing borrowings. However, the Group does not have any existing 
borrowings. In the absence of this the Group uses the swap curve 
with a corresponding rating as the starting point in determining the 
incremental borrowing rate. In line with the accounting standard the 
Group adjusts the swap curve rate for the term of the leases, the value 
of the leases and the creditworthiness of the Group. 

Once the lease liability has been recognised on the balance sheet 
the periodic lease repayments are allocated between an interest and 
a principal element. The interest is charged to profit or loss over the 
lease period so as to produce a constant periodic rate of interest on 
the remaining balance of the liability. Variable lease payments that 
do not depend on an index or a rate are recognised as expenses in 
the period in which the event or condition that triggers the payment 
occurs.

Right-of-use asset 

The right-of-use asset is initially calculated as being equal to the lease 
liability and then adjusted for the following:

 • Lease payments made on or before the commencement date less 

any incentives received

 • Any initial direct costs, and

 • An estimate of restoration costs.

This right-of-use asset is then depreciated on a straight-line basis over 
the calculated lease term.

Right-of-use assets are also subject to impairment testing under AASB 
136 Impairment of assets. 

Short term and low value assets 

The Group applies the short-term lease recognition exemption to 
its short-term leases (i.e., those leases that have a lease term of 12 
months or less from the commencement date and do not contain a 
purchase option). Payments associated with short-term leases and all 
leases of low-value assets are recognised on a straight-line basis as 
an expense in profit or loss.

 • fixed payments (including in-substance fixed payments), less any 

lease incentives receivable

(h) 

Variable costs

 • variable lease payment that are based on an index or a rate, 

initially measured using the index or rate as at the  
commencement date

 • amounts expected to be payable by the group under residual 

value guarantees

 • the exercise price of a purchase option if the group is reasonably 

certain to exercise that option, and

 • payments of penalties for terminating the lease, if the lease term 

reflects the group exercising that option.

The components to variable costs are made up of:

• 

• 

Costs incurred in obtaining an initial licence fee contract as well 
as incentives on achievement of KPIs. These are expensed as 
incurred.

Costs incurred in fulfilling the contract with a customer are 
capitalised if the requirements in AASB 15 are fulfilled and 
are then amortised in line with the satisfaction of the related 
performance obligation. The expense is recognised within 
the Depreciation and Amortisation line of the Consolidated 
Statement of Profit or Loss. 

125

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements(i) 

Variable customer SaaS costs

Variable customer SaaS costs relate to costs incurred in providing 
our customers with access to our SaaS Platform. These costs are 
expensed as incurred. 

(j) 

Impairment of assets

Goodwill and intangible assets that have an indefinite useful life are 
not subject to amortisation and are tested annually for impairment, 
or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate 
that they might be impaired. Other assets are tested for impairment 
whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the 
carrying amount may not be recoverable. An impairment loss is 
recognised for the amount by which the asset's carrying amount 
exceeds its recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the 
higher of an asset's fair value less costs to sell and value-in-use. For 
the purposes of assessing impairment, assets are grouped at the 
lowest levels for which there are separately identifiable cash inflows 
which are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets 
or groups of assets (cash-generating units). Non-financial assets other 
than goodwill that suffered an impairment are reviewed for possible 
reversal of the impairment at the end of each reporting period.

(k) 

Financial assets and liabilities

Financial instruments recognised in the statement of financial position 
include; cash and cash equivalents, trade and other receivables, 
contract assets, trade payables and contingent consideration.

(i) Classification

The Group classifies its financial assets and financial liabilities  
into the following measurement categories;

 • those to be measured at amortised cost 
(using the effective interest method) and;

 • those to be measured at fair value with changes  

through the profit or loss (FVPL). 

Classification into these categories is based on an assessment of the 
Groups’ business model for managing its financial instruments and the 
contractual terms of the cash flows. 

(ii) Measurement

Amortised cost 
Under this method the financial instrument is measured at the amount 
recognised at initial recognition minus principal repayments. Further 
adjustments to the carrying value of the financial instrument will 
arise if there is a modification to the contractual cash flows creating 
a gain/loss in the measurement or if there is no longer a reasonable 
expectation of recovery of a financial asset resulting in a write off. 

FVPL 
The financial instrument is measured at fair value. Changes in fair 
value are recognised in profit and loss as they arise. 

(iii) Impairment

The Group recognises impairment losses on its financial assets carried 
at amortised cost using an expected credit losses (ECL) model in line 
with AASB 9 Financial Instruments. The ECL model essentially aims to 
calculate the Assets’ credit risk. It involves consideration of scenarios 
that would lead to default, calculating the shortfall between what is 
contractually due and what would be received under each scenario 
and then multiplying the shortfall/loss by the probability of the default 
situation occurring.

The Group has elected to apply the AASB 9 simplified approach to 
measuring expected credit losses which uses a lifetime expected 
credit loss allowance for all trade receivables and contract assets. 
The Group has also made use of the practical expedient available 
for calculating expected credit losses for short term receivables. This 
practical expedient involves using a “provision matrix” to calculate the 
loss allowance. This matrix is based on historical default rates over the 
expected life of the trade receivables and it is adjusted for forward-
looking estimates.

A 6-month historical default rate is applied to the trade receivables 
balance to calculate the expected credit loss. This appears as a 
provision against the trade receivables balance. Movements in this 
provision are recognised as an expense in the consolidated income 
statement to the extent that the related revenue has been recognised 
in the consolidated income statement. If a receivable balance is 
identified as being unrecoverable it is written off against the allowance 
for expected credit losses. 

(l) 

Cash and cash equivalents

For the purpose of presentation in the statement of cash flows, cash 
and cash equivalents includes cash on hand, deposits held at call with 
financial institutions, other short-term, highly liquid investments with 
original maturities of three months or less that are readily convertible 
to known amounts of cash and which are subject to an insignificant 
risk of changes in value, and bank overdrafts. Cash and cash 
equivalents are presented in the consolidated statement of cash flows, 
net of outstanding bank overdrafts.

(m) 

Trade and other receivables

Trade and other receivables are recognised initially at transaction 
price which is deemed to be fair value and subsequently measured at 
amortised cost using the effective interest method. Trade receivables 
are typically due for settlement within 14 to 30 days.

The Group uses the simplified approach to measuring expected credit 
losses. The movement in the expected credit loss is recognised in the 
income statement within corporate expenses.

(o) 

Intangible assets

(i) Goodwill

Goodwill represents the excess of the cost of an acquisition over the 
fair value of the Group's share of the net identifiable assets of the 
acquired subsidiary/associate at the date of acquisition. Goodwill on 
acquisitions of subsidiaries is included in intangible assets. Goodwill is 
not amortised. Instead, goodwill is tested for impairment annually, or 
more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that it 
might be impaired and is carried at cost less accumulated impairment 
losses. Gains and losses on the disposal of an entity include the 
carrying amount of goodwill relating to the entity sold.

Goodwill is allocated to cash-generating units for the purpose of 
impairment testing. The allocation is made to those cash-generating 
units or groups of cash-generating units that are expected to benefit 
from the business combination in which the goodwill arose (note 4).

(ii) Intellectual property/source code

Intangible assets acquired separately are capitalised at cost, and 
if acquired as a result of a business combination, capitalised at fair 
value as at the date of acquisition. Following initial recognition, the 
cost model is applied to all classes of intangible assets. The useful 
lives of the intangible assets are assessed to be either finite or 
indefinite. Where amortisation is charged on intangible assets with 
finite lives, this expense is taken to the Income Statement through 
the 'depreciation and amortisation expense' line item. Intangible 
assets with finite lives are tested for impairment where an indicator of 
impairment exists. Useful lives are examined on an annual basis and 
adjustments, where applicable, are made on a prospective basis.

Intellectual Property/Source Code is amortised on a straight line basis 
over 3-8 years.

Gains or losses arising from the de-recognition of an intangible asset 
are measured as the difference between the net disposal proceeds 
and the carrying amount of the asset and are recognised in the 
statement of comprehensive income when the intangible asset is 
derecognised.

(n) 

Property, plant and equipment

(iii) Software development

Property, plant and equipment are measured at cost less accumulated 
depreciation and any impairment in value. Depreciation is calculated 
on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful economic lives of the 
assets as follows:

Office furniture and equipment

3-11 years

Computer software

Motor vehicles

3-4 years

4-5 years

The assets' residual values and useful lives are reviewed, and 
adjusted if appropriate, at the end of each reporting period.

An asset's carrying amount is written down immediately to its 
recoverable amount if the asset's carrying amount is greater than its 
estimated recoverable amount (note 1(j)).

Gains and losses on disposals are determined by comparing proceeds 
with carrying amount. These are included in the Statement of 
Comprehensive Income.

Research expenditure is recognised as an expense as incurred. 
Research costs are largely made up of employee labour which is 
included in employee costs in the consolidated income statement. 
Development expenditure is only capitalised if the recognition 
requirements within AASB 138 have been fulfilled and an economic 
benefit of more than 12 months is expected. 

Costs that are directly associated with the development of this 
software (largely CiAnywhere products) are recognised as an 
intangible asset where the following criteria are met:

(a) The technical feasibility of completing the intangible asset  

so that it will be available for use or sale;

(b) Intention to complete the intangible asset and use  
  or sell it;

(c) Ability to use or sell the intangible asset;

(d) How the intangible asset will generate probable 
  economic benefits. Among other things, the entity can 
  demonstrate the existence of a market for the output of 

the intangible asset or the intangible asset itself or, if it is 
to be used internally, the usefulness of the intangible asset; 

(e) The availability of adequate technical, financial and other  

resources to complete the development and to use or sell  
the intangible asset and

(f) Ability to measure reliably the expenditure attributable to  

the intangible asset during its development.

As a SaaS company, access is provided to our products via a SaaS 
platform over a prolonged term. The technical feasibility of our 
products can be established through pre-defined project roadmaps.

TechnologyOne follows a robust process to ensure the accuracy of the 
amounts capitalised on the balance sheet. The costs included in the 
balance are costs of personnel and other directly attributable costs 
incurred in the development of software. The process for determining 
what constitutes capitalisable spend under AASB 138 involves 
detailed analysis of all timesheet data available in regard to projects 
that employees have worked on during the year and other directly 
attributable costs in respect of software development spend.

Capitalised software development costs are recognised as an 
intangible asset and amortised over their estimated useful lives, which 
is considered to be from three to seven years. Software development 
costs are capitalised as “under development” until the products to 
which the costs relate become available for use. At the point in which 
the products become available for use, the costs are transferred from 
“under development” to “in use” and amortised from that point (refer 
to categorisation in note 13). Development costs previously recognised 
as expenses are not recognised as assets in a subsequent period.

(p) 

Trade and other payables

These amounts represent liabilities for goods and services provided  
to the Group prior to the end of financial year which are unpaid.  
The amounts are unsecured and are usually paid within 30 days  
of recognition.

(q) 

Provisions

Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present legal or 
constructive obligation as a result of past events, it is probable that an 
outflow of resources will be required to settle the obligation and the 
amount has been reliably estimated. Provisions are not recognised for 
future operating losses.

Provisions are measured at the present value of management's best 
estimate of the expenditure required to settle the present obligation at 
the end of the reporting period. The discount rate used to determine 
the present value is a pre-tax rate that reflects current market 
assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the 
liability. The increase in the provision due to the passage of time is 
recognised as interest expense.

127

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
(r) 

Employee benefit

(i) Short-term obligations

Liabilities for wages and salaries, including non-monetary benefits 
and annual leave expected to be settled within 12 months after the 
end of the period in which the employees render the related service 
are recognised in respect of employees' services up to the end of the 
reporting period and are measured at the amounts expected to be 
paid when the liabilities are settled. Liabilities for sick leave, which are 
non-vesting, are recognised when the leave is taken and measured at 
the rates paid or payable. 

(ii) Deferred STI

An amount equal to 25% of the annual STI earned by Executive KMP in 
the year is deferred and paid at the conclusion of the two-year period 
following the end of the financial year. It is accrued over a three-
year period- throughout the annual performance period in which it is 
determined and a deferral period of two years of service.

(iii) Long service leave

The liability for long service leave is recognised in the provision for 
employee benefits and is measured as the present value of expected 
future payments to be made in respect of services provided by 
employees up to the reporting period. Consideration is given to 
expected future wage and salary levels, experience of employee 
departures and periods of service. Expected future payments are 
discounted using market yields at the end of the reporting period on 
national corporate bonds with terms to maturity and currency that 
match, as closely as possible, the estimated future cash outflows.

(iv) Share-based payments

The Group provides benefits to certain employees in the form of 
share-based payment transactions, whereby employees render 
services in exchange for rights over shares. The costs of share-based 
payment transactions with employees are measured by reference to 
the fair value of the equity instruments at the date at which they are 
granted. Refer to note 33.

The cost of share-based payments is recognised, together  
with a corresponding increase in equity, over the period in which the 
performance and/or service conditions are fulfilled, ending on the 
date on which the relevant employees become fully entitled to the 
award (the vesting period). If options or rights do not vest at the end 
of the performance period due to the service condition or non-market 
condition not being met, the corresponding expense will be reversed.

(s) 

Contributed equity

Ordinary shares are classified as equity. 
Issued and paid up capital is recognised at the fair value of the 
consideration received. Any transaction costs arising on the issue of 
ordinary shares are recognised directly in equity as a reduction of the 
share proceeds received.

(t) 

Earnings per share

(i) Basic earnings per share

Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing:

 • The profit attributable to owners of the Group, excluding any costs 

of servicing equity other than ordinary shares

 • By the weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding 
during the year, adjusted for bonus elements in ordinary shares 
issued during the year and excluding treasury shares

(ii) Diluted earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share adjusts the figures used in the 
determination of basic earnings per share to take into account:

 • The after income tax effect of interest and other financing costs 

associated with dilutive potential ordinary shares

 • The weighted average number of additional ordinary shares that 
would have been outstanding assuming the conversion of all 
dilutive potential ordinary shares. 

(u) 

Dividends

Provision is made for the amount of any dividend declared, being 
appropriately authorised and no longer at the discretion of the entity, 
on or before the end of the reporting period but not distributed at the 
end of the reporting period.

(v) 

Goods and services tax (GST) and equivalent  
overseas value added taxes

Revenues, expenses and assets are recognised net of the amount of 
associated GST, unless the GST incurred is not recoverable from the 
taxation authority. In this case it is recognised as part of the cost of 
acquisition of the asset or as part of the expense.

Receivables and payables are stated inclusive of the amount of GST 
receivable or payable. The net amount of GST recoverable from, or 
payable to, the taxation authority is included with other receivables or 
payables in the statement of financial position.

Cash flows are presented on a gross basis. The GST components 
of cash flows arising from investing or financing activities which are 
recoverable from, or payable to the taxation authority, are presented 
as operating cash flows.

Financial Risk Management

2. 
Financial instruments recognised in the statement of financial position 
include; cash and cash equivalents, trade and other receivables, lease 
liabilities and trade payables.

It is, and has been throughout the period under review, the Group’s 
policy that no trading in financial instruments shall be undertaken. 
The main risks arising from the Group’s financial assets and liabilities 
are interest rate risk, foreign currency risk and credit risk. The Board 
reviews and agrees policies for managing each of these risks and they 
are summarised below.

Details of the significant accounting policies and methods adopted, 
including the criteria for recognition, the basis of measurement and 
the basis on which income and expenses are recognised, in respect 
of each class of financial asset, financial liability and equity instrument 
are disclosed in Note 1 to the Financial Statements.

The Group holds the following financial instruments: 

(a) 

 Interest rate risk

The Group’s cash and investment assets are exposed to movements 
in deposit and variable interest rates. The Group does not hedge this 
exposure. Interest rate risk on cash is not considered to be material.

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

142,853

125,244

50,580

37,396

193,433

162,640

(d) 

 Liquidity risk

Liquidity risk arises from the financial liabilities of the Group and the 
Group’s subsequent ability to meet their obligations to repay their 
financial liabilities as and when they fall due.

The below table represents the financial assets under note 2(c)  
and the liquidity risk of financial liabilities referred to in note 2(d).

Less than 
12 months
$’000

Between 
1 and 5 
years
$’000

Over 5 
years
$’000

Total
contractual
cash
flows
$’000

25,149

11,418

30,411

37,123

At 30 September 2021

-

Financial assets

29,345

Cash and cash equivalents

66,978

66,468

Trade and other receivables

142,853

50,580

193,433

Total

Financial liabilities

Trade and other payables

25,149

Contingent consideration

3,842

7,576

Lease liabilities

4,800

29,297

Total

33,791

36,873

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

173

173

142,853

50,580

193,433

25,149

11,418

34,270

70,837

Net inflow / (outflow)

159,642

(36,873)

(173)

122,596

Financial assets

Cash and cash equivalents 

Trade and other receivables

Financial liabilities

Trade and other payables

Contingent consideration

Lease liability

(b) 

 Foreign currency risk

As a result of operations in New Zealand, Malaysia, Papua New 
Guinea and the United Kingdom and sales contracts denominated in 
United States dollars, the Group's statement of financial position can 
be affected by movements in the exchange rates applicable to these 
geographical locations and currencies.

The Group does not hedge this risk. The Group’s exposure to foreign 
currency changes is not significant.

At balance date, the Group had the following exposures in Australian 
dollar equivalents of amounts to foreign currencies which are not 
effectively hedged:

2021
USD
$’000

2021
PGK
$’000

2020
USD
$’000

2020
PGK
$’000

Trade Receivables

-

-

-

1,650

(c)  

Credit risk

The Group is exposed to credit risk from its operating activities 
(primarily trade and other receivables and contract assets) and from 
its financing activities, including deposits with banks and financial 
institutions. 

To manage this risk the Group trades only with recognised, 
creditworthy third parties. It is the Group's policy that all customers 
who wish to trade on credit terms are subject to credit verification 
procedures. In addition, receivable balances are monitored on an 
ongoing basis with the result that the Group's expected credit loss is 
not significant. Information on credit risk exposures is contained in 
Note 9.

Less than 
12 months
$’000

Between 
1 and 5 
years
$’000

Over 5 
years
$’000

Total
contractual
cash
flows
$’000

At 30 September 2020

Financial assets

Cash and cash equivalents

Trade and other receivables

Total

Financial liabilities

125,244

37,396

162,640

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Trade and other payables 

37,123

Lease liabilities

2,341

28,508

3,566

Total

39,464

28,508

3,566

Net inflow / (outflow)

123,176

(28,508)

(3,566)

125,244

37,396

162,640

37,123

34,415

71,538

91,102

129

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
 
 
(e) 

 Fair value measurements

Contingent consideration is classified as Level 3. The balance of 
contingent consideration is recognised as contingent consideration 
in the Consolidated Statement of Financial Position, and it is split 
between a current and non-current portion. The release of the 
contingent consideration that does not represent payment is 
recognised within the other income line of the consolidated  
income statement.

Contingent Consideration

Opening balance at 1 October 2020

Amounts added for Scientia (note 25)

Payments made

Closing balance at 30 September 2021

Contingent Consideration

Opening balance at 1 October 2019

Payments (DMS and JRA)

Reduction in contingent consideration (JRA)

Closing balance at 30 September 2020

2021
$’000

-

11,418

-

11,418

2020
$’000

223

(223)

-

-

The carrying value of trade and other receivables, contract assets 
and trade payables are assumed to approximate their fair value due 
to their short-term nature or the effect of discounting on non-current 
financial assets not being significant.

All other assets are reviewed for indicators or object evidence of 
impairment. If indicators or objective evidence exists, the recoverable 
amount is reviewed.

(ii) Share-based payments

The Group provides benefits to certain employees in the form of 
share-based payment transactions, whereby employees render 
services in exchange for rights over shares. The costs of share-based 
payment transactions with employees are measured by reference to 
the fair value of the equity instruments at the date at which they are 
granted. Refer to note 33.

The cost of share-based payments is recognised, together with 
a corresponding increase in equity, over the period in which the 
performance and/or service conditions are fulfilled, ending on the date 
on which the relevant employees become fully entitled to the award 
(the vesting period). In the event that the rights over shares do not 
vest at the end of the performance period, the expense relating to the 
unvested rights is reversed. No expense is recognised for awards that 
do not ultimately vest due to not meeting the non-market conditions or 
service conditions.

(iii) Revenue contracts

Initial licence fee contracts entered into by the Group require 
judgement in the identification and separation of the contract 
components related to software licence fees, Annual Licence Fees 
and platform services. The Group assesses each customer contract 
individually and revenue is assigned to each component based upon 
the stand alone fair value of the component relevant to the total 
contract value.

(iv) Capitalisation of development costs

(f) 

 Capital risk management

The Group manages its capital to ensure that entities in the Group will 
be able to continue as a going concern while maximising the return to 
stakeholders through the optimisation of the debt and equity balance.

The Group capitalises costs related to software development. 
Software development costs are recognised upon meeting the criteria 
set out in note 1(o)(iii). The carrying value of these costs are regularly 
reviewed for impairment. Software development costs are amortised 
over a period of three to seven years.

The current risk management structure of the Group is to use all 
equity funding.

(v) COVID-19

The equity funded position of the Group is managed by the Board 
through dividends, new shares and share buy backs as well as the 
issue of new equity where considered appropriate to fund business 
acquisitions.

3.  Critical accounting estimates  

and judgements

Estimates and judgements are continually evaluated and are based 
on historical experience and other factors, including expectations of 
future events that may have a financial impact on the entity and that 
are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances.

The Group makes estimates and assumptions concerning the future. 
The resulting accounting estimates will, by definition, seldom equal 
the related actual results. The estimates and assumptions that have 
a significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying 
amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial year are 
discussed below.

(i) Impairment of goodwill and other assets

The Group tests annually whether goodwill has suffered any 
impairment, in accordance with the accounting policy stated in note 
1(o)(i). The recoverable amounts of cash-generating units have been 
determined based on value-in-use calculations. These calculations 
require the use of assumptions. Refer to note 13 for details of these 
assumptions and the potential impact of changes to the assumptions.

Management have considered the potential impact of COVID-19 in 
performing the Group’s impairment assessments and in establishing 
the expected credit loss on financial assets. No adjustments 
were made to the Group’s assets as a result of these additional 
assessments. At a time when many businesses have struggled 
during the pandemic, TechnologyOne has continued to perform 
strongly. There has been no impact to the Group’s balance sheet. 
TechnologyOne has not received any JobKeeper government support.

(vi) Legal Provision

Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present obligation 
(legal or constructive) as a result of a past event, it is probable that an 
outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be required 
to settle the obligation and a reliable estimate can be made of the 
amount of the obligation. The group recognises legal provisions based 
on the probability and management’s best estimate of the outcome of 
the claim.

(vii) Contingent consideration

Contingent consideration has been recognised at the present value 
of anticipated costs for future contingent earn out considerations 
resulting from the acquisitions made by the Group. In estimating the 
liability, it was assumed that the maximum earn out amount will be 
payable based on current operating projections. Further details are 
available at note 25.

4. 

(a) 

Segment information  

Description of segments

The Group’s chief operating decision maker, being the Chief Executive 
Officer, makes financial decisions and allocates resources based 
on the information received from the Group’s internal management 
system. Sales are attributed to an operating segment based on the 
type of product or service provided to the customer.

Segment information is prepared in conformity with the accounting 
policies of the Group as discussed in note 1 and the Accounting 
Standard AASB 8 Operating Segments. 

2020

Revenue from contracts  
with customers

SaaS fees*

Annual licence fees*

Consulting services*

Initial licence fees **

Other income

 • Software – consists of Sales and Marketing, R&D,  

SaaS platform.

 • Consulting – responsible for services in relation to  

our software.

Net royalty

Total revenue

Expenses

Software
$'000

Consulting
$’000

Corporate
$’000

Total  
$’000

106,171

102,272

-

-

-

62,482

27,342

384

-

-

-

-

-

-

367

(170)

106,171

102,272

62,482

27,342

751

-

-

(53,819)

(6,642)

60,461

180,312

58,048

60,658

299,018

The Group’s reportable segments are:

Intersegment revenue

(2,038)

2,208

 • Corporate – includes all corporate functions.

Total external expenses

(127,681)

(44,393)

(44,474)

(216,548)

Intersegment revenues/expenses are where one operating segment 
has been charged for the use of another's expertise.

Royalties are a mechanism whereby each segment pays or 
receives funding for their contribution to the ongoing success of 
TechnologyOne. For example, Software pays Corporate for the use of 
corporate services.

The chief operating decision maker views each segment’s 
performance based on revenue post royalties and profit before tax. No 
reporting or reviews are made of segment assets, liabilities and cash 
flows and as such this is not measured or reported by segment.

(b) 

2021

Segment information provided to the  
Chief Operating Decision Maker (CODM)

Software
$'000

Consulting
$’000

Corporate
$’000

Total  
$’000

Revenue from contracts  
with customers

SaaS fees*

Annual licence fees*

Consulting services*

Initial licence fees **

Other income

Intersegment revenue

Net royalty

Total revenue

Expenses

151,052

78,965

-

-

-

64,508

16,770

462

(281)

-

-

304

-

-

-

-

255

(23)

(56,893)

(6,547)

63,440

151,052

78,965

64,508

16,770

717

-

-

190,075

58,265

63,672

312,012

Total external expenses

(126,666)

(42,657)

(44,846)

(214,169)

Profit before tax

63,409

15,608

18,826

97,843

Income tax expense

Profit for the year

Total assets

Total liabilities

Total depreciation and amortisation

*Recognised over time / as services are rendered 

**Recognised at a point in time

(25,152)

72,691

454,728

264,494

(25,832)

Profit before tax

52,631

13,655

16,184

82,470

Income tax expense

Profit for the year

Total assets

Total liabilities

Total depreciation and amortisation

*Recognised over time / as services are rendered

**Recognised at a point in time

(c) Other segment information

(i) Segment revenue 

Australia 

New Zealand & Asia Pacific*

APAC total

United Kingdom

(19,525)

62,945

375,909

233,741

(18,638)

2021
$'000

2020
$'000

260,564

250,586

38,609

36,533

299,173

287,119

12,839

11,899

Total segment revenues from sales to external customers

312,012

299,018

(ii) Segment assets 

Australia

New Zealand and Asia Pacific*

APAC total

United Kingdom

Total segment assets

2021
$'000

2020
$'000

      380,116 

319,750

         14,754 

19,834

      394,870 

339,584

         33,509 

7,720

      428,379 

347,304

All significant non-current assets are located in Australia.  
Segment assets are presented net of deferred tax.

*Asia Pacific includes Malaysia and South Pacific

131

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
 
 
(iii) Major customers

The Group has a number of customers to which it provides both 
products and services, none of which contribute greater than 10% of 
external revenue. 

5.(a) Other income

Other income

Foreign exchange gains / (losses)

Interest received

Other

Total other income

2021
$’000

2020  
$’000

(9)

225

501

717

(3)

353

401

751

Income tax expenses

 Income tax expense

7. 

(a) 

Current tax

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

17,760

12,045

Relating to origination and reversal of temporary differences

7,315

8,680

Adjustments for tax expense of prior periods

77

(1,200)

Money market accounts at call are made for varying periods of 
between one day and three months, depending on immediate cash 
requirements of the Group, and earn interest at the respective money 
market deposit rates. Given the short-term nature of these accounts 
the fair value of cash assets at 30 September are their carrying values.

9.  Current assets - Trade and  

other receivables

Total revenue

312,012

299,018

Deferred income tax expense / (revenue) included in income 
tax expense comprises:

25,152

19,525

Trade and other receivables

Allowance for expected credit losses

(Increase) / decrease in deferred tax assets

(4,492)

(6,575)

Sundry receivables

6. 

Expenses

Profit before income tax includes the  
following specific expenses:

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

Increase / (decrease) in deferred tax liabilities

10,500

10,960

Adjustments for deferred taxes of prior periods

1,307

4,295

7,315

8,680

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

51,410

40,320

(1,337)

(2,885)

507

(39)

50,580

37,396

5.  Revenue

Revenue from contracts with customers

SaaS fees*

Annual licence fees*

Consulting services*

2021
$’000

2020  
$’000

151,052

106,171

77,993

101,121

64,508

62,482

Revenue - SaaS and continuing business

293,553

269,774

Initial licence fees**

16,770

27,342

Annual licence fees associated with initial licence fees*1

972

1,151

Revenue - Legacy licence business

17,742

28,493

Total revenue from contracts with customers

311,295

298,267

*Recognised over time / as services are rendered

**Recognised at a point in time

1 This represents revenue on Annual Licence Fees recognised from the date the associated initial licence is 
delivered until the end of the first financial year post delivery.

Depreciation

Plant and equipment

Total depreciation

Amortisation

Other intangible amortisation

Contract acquisition costs amortisation

Capitalised development amortisation

Amortisation of right-of-use assets

Total amortisation

Total depreciation and amortisation

Wages and salaries

Defined contribution plan expense

Payroll tax

Provision for employee benefits

Other

Total employee costs 

Share-based payments

Occupancy costs

Finance expense

Profit and loss movement in expected credit loss

Foreign exchange (gain) / loss

(Gain) / Loss on sale of property, plant and equipment

3,331

3,905

3,331

3,905

443

346

3,639

2,493

13,429

4,990

6,103

5,791

22,501

14,733

25,832

18,638

83,722

91,622

9,480

7,593

1,045

9,919

6,366

1,701

8,541

10,007

110,381

119,615

3,213

3,305

1,942

3,259

1,493

1,495

267

(21)

(13)

34

509

(38)

In addition to the employee benefits expense disclosed above, 
‘Variable costs’ in the consolidated income statement includes $17.3m 
(2020: $18.6m) relating to employee costs, ‘Contract acquisition costs’ 
in the consolidated statement of financial position includes $8.3m 
in current year employee benefits (2020: $4.9m) and ‘Capitalised 
development’ includes $36.1m in current year employee benefits 
(2020: $32.3m).  

(b) 

Numerical reconciliation of income tax  
expense to prima facie tax payable

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

Profit from continuing operations before income tax expense

97,843

82,470

Tax at the Australian tax rate of 30% (2020 - 30%)

29,353

24,741

Adjustments for current tax of prior periods

77

(1,200)

(i) Trade and other receivables are non-interest bearing and are 
on 14 to 30 day terms. No interest is charged on trade and other 
receivables. 

Included in the trade and other receivable balance are debtors with 
a carrying amount of $4.3m (2020 - $7.6m) which are past due at the 
reporting date for which the consolidated entity has not specifically 
provided as there has not been a significant change in credit quality 
and the consolidated entity believes that the amounts are still 
considered recoverable. The consolidated entity does not hold any 
collateral over these balances, however is able to withdraw future 
support and software licence use rights if concerns arise relating to 
the recoverability of an outstanding customer balance.

Research and development tax concession

(4,235)

(4,131)

(a) Allowance for expected credit losses

Expenditure not allowable for income tax purposes

(43)

115

Income tax expense

25,152

19,525

Movements in the provision for impairment of receivables are  
as follows:

(c)  

Amounts recognised directly in equity

Opening balance - 1 October

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

2,885

1,135

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

Aggregate current and deferred tax arising in the reporting 
period and not recognised in net profit or loss or other 
comprehensive income but directly debited or credited to 
equity: 

Net deferred tax - debited (credited) directly to equity

(3,750)

(2,315)

8.  Current assets - Cash  

and cash equivalents

Increase/(decrease) in expected credit loss allowance

780

2,885

Amounts reversed/written off

Closing balance - 30 September

(2,328)

(1,135)

1,337

2,885

In determining the recoverability of a trade and other receivable 
the Group considers any change in the credit quality of the trade 
receivable from the date credit was initially granted up to the reporting 
date. The concentration of credit risk is limited due to the customer 
base being large and unrelated. 

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

Age

Trade  
Debtors

Expected  
credit loss

Trade  
Debtors

Expected  
credit loss

Cash and cash equivalents

142,853

125,244

The Group has a secured $2 million interchangeable facility which 
is transferable between an Overdraft, Fixed Rate Commercial Bill 
and Variable Rate Commercial Bill to assist with working capital 
requirements. The facility is unused at 30 September 2021.

Cash at bank earns interest at floating rates based on daily bank 
deposit rates.

2021
$’000

43,602

4,354

759

2,695

2021
$’000

(480)

(48)

(8)

(801)

2020
$’000

30,051

5,915

715

3,369

2020
$’000

(456)

(90)

(11)

(2,328)

51,410

(1,337)

40,050

(2,885)

0 – 30 days

31 – 60 days

61 – 90 days

91+ days

Total

133

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
10.  Contract asset

Contract assets

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

22,918

22,283

12.  Non-current assets - property,  

plant and equipment

Contract assets - non current

2,962

-

Year ended 30 September 2021

Allowance for expected credit losses

(209)

(232)

Opening net book amount

25,671

22,051

Additions

The above contract asset balance represents revenue recognised for 
contracts with customers which has not been invoiced at the end of 
the financial year, in line with customer contracts.

Expected credit loss for contract assets   

Movements in the provision for impairment of contract assets are as 

follows:

Opening balance - 1 October

Increase/(decrease) in expected credit loss allowance 
recognised in profit and loss during the year

Unused amounts reversed

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

232

(23)

-

115

117

-

Closing balance - 30 September

209

232

11.  Current assets - Other current  

assets

Deposits receivable

2021
$’000

238

238

2020
$’000

397

397

Office furniture 
& equipment
$’000

Other
$’000

8,823

1,525

(17)

(3,239)

-

14

7,106

146

-

-

(92)

119

-

173

Total
$’000

8,969

1,525

(17)

(3,331)

119

14

7,279

42,898

(35,673)

7,225

4,770

(4,716)

54

47,668

(40,389)

7,279

Disposals

Depreciation charge

Make good movement

Exchange difference

Closing net book amount

At 30 September 2021

Cost

Accumulated depreciation

Net book amount

Year ended 30 September 2020

Opening net book amount

Additions 

Disposals

Depreciation charge

Make good movement

Exchange difference

10,659

2,008

(51)

(3,788)

-

9

Closing net book amount

8,837

241

22

-

(117)

(14)

-

132

At 30 September 2020

Cost

41,510

4,769

Accumulated depreciation

(32,687)

(4,623)

Net book amount

8,823

146

10,900

2,030

(51)

(3,905)

(14)

9

8,969

46,279

(37,310)

8,969

13.  Non-current assets - Intangible assets

Year ended 30 September 2021

Opening net book amount

Additions

Transfers to software - in use

Amortisation charge

Impairment

Exchange difference

Intellectual 
property/ 
source code 
$’000

Customer 
contracts 
$’000

Contract 
acquisition 
costs1
$’000

Software under 
development
$’000

Software in use 
$’000

Total 
$’000

4,023

1,141

-

(388)

-

16

713

-

-

9,991

8,370

26,983

41,858

-

(38,546)

(55)

(3,639)

-

-

-

(45)

-

-

-

35,573

-

38,546

(13,429)

-

-

110,533

74,365

-

(17,511)

-

(29)

Goodwill 
$’000

33,250

22,996

-

-

-

-

Closing net book amount

56,246

4,792

658

14,677

30,295

60,690

167,358

At 30 September 2021

Cost

Accumulated amortisation

Accumulated impairment

Net book amount

Year ended 30 September 2020

62,999

-

(6,753)

56,246

12,331

(4,862)

(2,677)

4,792

Opening net book amount

33,250

3,503

Additions

Transfers to software - in use

Amortisation charge

Impairment

Exchange difference

-

-

-

-

-

819

-

(291)

-

(8)

1,100

(442)

-

658

768

-

-

23,808

(9,131)

-

30,295

80,777

211,310

-

-

(20,087)

(34,522)

-

(9,430)

14,677

30,295

60,690

167,358

7,519

4,972

-

(55)

(2,493)

-

-

-

(7)

23,825

37,069

(33,911)

-

-

-

7,765

-

33,911

(6,103)

-

-

76,630

42,860

-

(8,942)

-

(15)

Closing net book amount

33,250

4,023

713

9,991

26,983

35,573

110,533

At 30 September 2020

Cost

Accumulated amortisation

Accumulated impairment

Net book amount

40,003

-

(6,753)

33,250

11,174

(4,474)

(2,677)

4,023

1,100

(387)

-

713

15,483

(5,492)

-

26,983

-

-

42,231

(6,658)

-

136,974

(17,011)

(9,430)

9,991

26,983

35,573

110,533

1 Balance of contract acquisition costs is split between current portion of $5.0m and non-current portion of $9.7m (2020: current $2.9m; non-current $7.0m).

(a) Impairment tests for goodwill

Goodwill and indefinite life intangibles are allocated to the Group's 
Software and Consulting cash generating units (CGUs) which are also 
operating and reportable segments for impairment testing purposes.

A segment-level summary of the goodwill and indefinite life intangible 
assets allocation is presented to the right.

Software 
$’000

Consulting 
$’000

Corporate 
$’000

Total 
$’000

46,638

9,608

2021

Goodwill

2020

Goodwill

Indefinite life intangibles

1,362

660

48,000

10,268

Software 
$’000

Consulting 
$’000

Corporate 
$’000

23,643

9,608

Indefinite life intangibles

1,362

660

25,005

10,268

-

-

-

-

-

-

56,246

2,022

58,268

Total 
$’000

33,251

2,022

35,273

135

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
 
15.  Current liabilities - Trade and  

other payables

19.  Non-current liabilities -  

Provisions

Lease liability

The recoverable amounts have been determined based on a value in 
use calculation using cash flow projections based on financial budgets 
approved by senior management covering a five year period, as there 
is no active market against which to compare the fair value of the unit.

In the current year, there is a new CGU as a result of the acquisition. 
This increased Goodwill by $22.9m. This CGU has not been tested 
for impairment as at 30 September 2021 due to being acquired 
near balance sheet date and the allocation of goodwill remaining 
provisional. Refer to note 25 for further details.

The key assumptions used for all CGUs in value in use calculations  
for 30 September 2021 and 2020 are:

 • Budgeted profit 

 • Growth rates - based on long-term historical trends  

for each segment

 • The discount rate applied to cash flow projections  

is 15% pre-tax (2020 - 15%)

 • Terminal growth rates - these have been set at 2% (2020 - 2%)

14.  Non-current assets - Deferred  

tax assets

Trade payables

Sundry creditors

Directors fees

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

29,445

29,315

7,021

7,249

101

559

36,567

37,123

Trade payables and sundry creditors are non-interest bearing and 
are normally settled on 30 day terms. No interest is payable on 
outstanding balances. The Group has financial risk management 
policies in place to ensure that all payables are paid within the  
credit timeframe.

16.  Current liabilities -  

Deferred revenue

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

Carrying amount at 1 October

Carrying amount at 30 September

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

144,148

147,558

160,015

144,148

The balance comprises temporary differences attributable to:

Employee benefits

Provisions-other

Accrued expenses

Intangibles

Copyright - software

Lease liability (net)

Employee share trust

Deferred revenue

Other

Set-off of deferred tax liabilities pursuant to set-off provisions 
(note 21)

Net deferred tax assets

Net deferred tax assets expected to be recovered within 12 
months

Net deferred tax assets expected to be recovered after more 
than 12 months

5,179

2,131

524

558

39

4,958

1,089

2,204

753

245

2,864

1,718

4,927

3,536

45,877

      40,762 

1,642

232

63,741

55,497

(37,392)

(26,892)

26,349

28,605

44,059

13,779

(17,710)

14,826

26,349

28,605

Movements:

Opening balance at 1 October

55,497

48,085

Credited / (charged) to the consolidated income statement

4,492

6,575

Revenue recognised from the opening balance

142,411

145,359

Deferred Revenue represents payments received or receivable in 
advance from customers for SaaS Fees and Annual Licence Fees 
which will be recognised as revenue in future periods, generally 
over the next 12 months. These amounts are a contract liability under 
AASB15. These amounts do not result in a future cash outflow.  
The operating costs to deliver the services are not significant. 

17.  Current liabilities - Provisions

Make good provision

Other provisions¹

Annual leave

Long service leave

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

148

569

5,444

5,416

8,305

8,030

7,322

6,533

21,219

20,548

1 On 2 October 2020, the Federal Court issued a judgement against TechnologyOne in a civil employment case. 
As a result of the judgement, the Group’s provision was increased to $5.2m as at 30 September 2020. The 
company lodged an appeal to the Full Federal Court on 27 October 2020.  The company won its appeal, with 
the original judgement being overturned in August 2021, and a retrial being ordered. The Group has retained 
the full value of the provision at 30 September 2021 ($5.2m) based on management’s best estimate pending 
the results of the retrial.

18.  Contingent Consideration

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

Credited / (charged) to equity

3,750

837

Contingent consideration

               3,842 

Offset from deferred tax liabilities

(37,392)

(26,892)

Contingent consideration- non-current

               7,576 

Closing balance at 30 September

26,349

28,605

Total

             11,418 

-

-

-

Refer to note 25- Business Combinations for details of the acquisition.

Long service leave

Make good provision

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

1,924

2,285

143

145

2,067

2,430

Year ended 30 September 2021

Opening liability

New leases entered into during the year

Modifications during the year

(a) Movements in provisions

Movements in each class of provision during the financial year, other 
than employee benefits, are set out below:

The non-current provisions have been discounted using a pre-tax rate 
that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money 
and the risks specific to the liability.

Payments

Interest expense

Exchange difference

Property
$'000

Equipment
$'000

29,284

2,041

(111)

61

51

-

Total
$’000

29,345

2,092

(111)

(2,347)

(49)

(2,396)

1,438

42

1

-

1,439

42

Closing liability

   30,347 

               64 

               30,411 

The following are amounts recognised in profit or loss under  
AASB 16:

e
v
a
e

l

e
c
i
v
r
e
s
g
n
o
L

0
0
0
’
$

e
v
a
e
L
l

a
u
n
n
A

0
0
0
’
$

d
o
o
G
e
k
a
M

0
0
0
’
$

t
n
e
m

t
i

m
m
o
C

l

e
v
e
L
e
c
i
v
r
e
S

0
0
0
’
$

n
o
i
t
a
r
e
d
i
s
n
o
C
t
n
e
g
n
i
t
n
o
C

n
o
i
s
i
v
o
r
p

l

a
g
e
L

0
0
0
$

'

0
0
0
$

'

l

a
t
o
T

0
0
0
’
$

8,030

8,817

714

217

5,200

-

22,978

Amortisation on right-of-use assets

Interest expense on lease liabilities

Expense related to short-term leases  
(included in occupancy costs)

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

4,990

      5,791 

1,439

      1,454 

25              599 

Total amount recognised in profit or loss

6,454

      7,844 

3,110

1,919

142

39

21

11,418

16,649

Cashflow for leases

(2,835)

(1,488)

(566)

(34)

-

-

(4,923)

8,305

9,248

290

222

5,221

11,418

34,704

Total cash outflow as a lessee1

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

2,421

6,564

2,421

6,564

2021

Carrying amount 
at 1 October 2020

Additional 
provisions 
recognised 

Amount released 
during the year

Carrying amount 
at 30 September 
2021

1Reduction in lease payments year on year is largely due to a rental rebate on the Group’s HQ lease.  
This rebate significantly reduces base rent payable between 1 July 2020 and 1 April 2022. The rent rebate 
applied in FY21 was $4.8m (FY20 $867k).

Right-of-use assets

Year ended 30 September 2020

Property
$'000

Equipment
$'000

Total
$’000

Opening net book amount

28,578

108

28,686

20.  Leases

Right-of-use-assets

Year ended 30 September 2021

Opening net book amount

Additions

Modifications during the year

Disposals

Depreciation charge

Exchange difference

Closing net book amount

At 30 September 2021

Cost

Accumulated depreciation

Net book amount

Property
$'000

Equipment
$'000

23,723

2,041

41

-

(4,933)

42

20,914

31,593

(10,679)

20,914

63

51

-

-

(57)

-

57

159

(102)

57

Total
$’000

23,786

2,092

41

-

Additions

Modifications during the year

Disposals

(4,990)

Depreciation charge

42

Exchange difference

20,971

Closing net book amount

At 30 September 2020

31,752

Cost

(10,781)

20,971

Accumulated depreciation

Net book amount

1,206

(324)

-

(5,746)

9

23,723

29,469

(5,746)

23,723

-

-

-

(45)

-

63

108

(45)

63

1,206

(324)

-

(5,791)

9

23,786

29,577

(5,791)

23,786

137

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Lease liability

Year ended 30 September 2020

Property
$'000

Equipment
$'000

Opening liability

32,709

108

New leases entered into during the year

Modifications during the year

1,351

(324)

-

-

Total
$’000

32,817

1,351

(324)

Payments

Interest expense

Exchange difference

Closing liability

(5,916)

(49)

(5,965)

1,452

12

2

-

1,454

12

29,284 

61 

29,345 

21.   Non-current liabilities –  

Deferred tax liabilities

The balance comprises temporary  
differences attributable to:

Contract assets

Accelerated depreciation for tax purposes

Prepayments

Capitalised development 

Contract acquisition costs

Total deferred tax liabilities

Set-off of deferred tax liabilities pursuant to set-off provisions 
(note 14)

Net deferred tax liabilities

Movements:

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

(5,222)

(4,269)

(851)

(1,323)

(24)

(28)

(27,271)

(18,767)

(4,024)

(2,505)

(37,392)

(26,892)

37,392

26,892

-

-

Opening balance at 1 October 

(26,892)

(15,932)

Date

Details

Number of shares

$’000

30 Sep 2021

Closing balance

321,648,793

51,645

1 Oct 2019

Opening balance

317,827,581

35,302

Exercise of options

1,467,877

5,249

30 Sep 2020

Closing balance

319,295,458

40,551

Information relating to the TechnologyOne Employee Share Option 
Plan, including details of options issued, exercised and lapsed during 
the financial year and options outstanding at the end of the financial 
year, is set out in note 33. 

23.  Reserves

(a) Other reserves

Share-based payments

Foreign currency translation

Dividend reserve

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

38,305

31,342

1,958

2,136

32,454

30,046

72,717

63,524

(b) Nature and purpose of other reserves

(i) Share-based payments

The reserve is used to record the value of equity benefits provided 
to employees, through share-based payment transactions and 
associated tax benefits.

(ii) Foreign currency translation

Exchange differences arising on translation of the foreign controlled 
entity are recognised in other comprehensive income as described 
in note 1(c) and accumulated in a separate reserve within equity. The 
cumulative amount is reclassified to the income statement when the 
net investment is disposed of.

Charged/(credited) to the Consolidated income statement

(10,500)

(10,960)

(iii) Dividend reserve

Offset to deferred tax assets

Closing balance at 30 September

37,392

26,892

-

-

The reserve records retained earnings set aside for the payment  
of future dividends.

22.  Contributed Equity

24.  Dividends

Share capital

Ordinary shares

Fully paid

2021
Shares

2020
Shares

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

321,648,793

319,295,458

51,645

40,551

Movements in ordinary share capital

Final dividend for the year ended 30 September 2020 of 9.41 
Cents (2019 - 8.78 Cents) per fully paid share paid in December 
2020 (2019 - December 2019)

60% franked (2019 - 75%) based on tax paid at 30%

Interim dividend for the year ended 30 September 2021 of 3.82 
Cents (2020 - 3.47 Cents) per fully paid share paid in June 2021 
(2020 - June 2020)

60% franked (2020 - 60%) based on tax paid at 30%

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

30,225

27,930

12,279

11,058

(a) Employee Share Option Plan

Total dividends paid

42,504

38,988

Date

Details

Number of shares

1 Oct 2020

Opening balance

Exercise of options

Share grant to employees

319,295,458

2,282,537

70,798

$’000

40,551

10,595

499

(a) Dividends policy

TechnologyOne’s goal is, to the extent possible, to increase dividends 
paid by 8% to 10% per annum.

(b) Dividends not recognised at the end of the reporting 
period

The initial accounting of the assets and liabilities acquired is 
incomplete and provisional as the information is not available in part 
due to the business being in administration prior to it being acquired. 
The fair value of the acquisition was determined to be $22.9m (12.2m 
GBP) and has been initially recorded to goodwill as there is limited 
information for the purchase price allocation prior to the financial 
statements being issued. 

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

The initial cash payment of $11.5m (6.1m GBP) on 25 August 2021 
included payments to extinguish the list of liabilities of  Scientia at the 
time of acquisition as well as payments to shareholders. 

Final

In addition to the above dividends, since year end the directors 
have recommended the payment of a final dividend of 10.09 
cents per fully paid ordinary share (2020 - 9.41 cents) 60% 
franked (2020 - 60%) based on tax paid at 30% (2020 - 30%).

The aggregate amount of proposed dividend expected to be 
paid out of retained earnings, but not recognised as a liability 
at year end

32,454

30,046

32,454

30,046

(c) Franked Dividends

The franked portions of the final dividends recommended after 30 
September 2020 will be franked out of existing franking credits or out 
of franking credits arising from the payment of income tax in the year 
ended 30 September 2021.

Franking account balance as at the end of the financial year at 
30% (2020: 30%)

Franking credits that will arise from the payments of income tax 
payable as at the end of the financial year

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

(1,391)

3,044

3,324

519

1,933

3,563

The above amounts represent the balance of the franking account as 
at the end of the reporting period, adjusted for:

(a) franking credits that will arise from the payment of the 
  amount of the provision for income tax

(b) franking debits that will arise from the payment of dividends 

recognised as a liability at the reporting date

The impact on the franking account of the dividend recommended by 
the Directors since the end of the reporting date, but not recognised 
as a liability at the reporting date, will be a reduction in the franking 
account of $8,345,408 (2020 - $7,730,209).

25.  Business Combinations
On 15 September 2021, Technology One UK Limited acquired 100% of 
the issued shares and voting rights in Scientia Resource Management 
Limited (Scientia). The Scientia acquisition forms part of the strategic 
focus to deliver further functionality for Higher Education software 
solution and it will accelerate the growth and competitive position 
in the UK as well as have significant benefits in the Australian 
Higher Education market. Scientia’s product, Syllabus Plus, provides 
advanced academic timetabling and resource scheduling for over 150 
leading universities across the United Kingdom and Australia.

The sales and purchase agreement outlined earn out clauses 
including: 

 • The first earn out clause of $3.8m (2.1m GBP) is consideration for 
the acquisition and is earned through future performance hurdles 
on net profit before tax (NPBT) and annual recurring revenue (ARR) 
as of 31 December 2021. The company has considered the future 
contingent payment to be a level 3 financial liability. The fair value 
of the earn out considering the time value discount is $3.8m.

 • The second earn out clause of $7.6m (4.1m GBP) is consideration 
for the acquisition and is earned through future performance 
hurdles on NPBT and ARR as of 31 December 2022. The company 
has considered the future contingent payment to be a level 3 
financial liability. The fair value of the earn out considering the 
time value discount is $7.4m.

Further payments to the major shareholder may be due subject to 
the achievement of certain future NPBT and ARR targets between 31 
December 2022 and 31 December 2024. These payments would be 
accrued if deemed to be earned and probable. As of 30 September 
2021, there has been no provision recorded. 

There were $0.5m of acquisition costs incurred during the year ended 
30 September 2021. The revenue and profit and loss for Scientia was 
insignificant for the 15 days of consolidation. Given the business was in 
administration prior to the acquisition it is impracticable to determine 
what the revenue or profit and loss would be for the full year based on 
historical results as they are not reflective the business performance.

26.  Key management personnel  

disclosures

(a) Key management personnel disclosures

Short-term employee benefits

5,733,291

5,289,169

2021
$

2020
$

Deferred STI

Share-based payments

368,786

227,586

974,629

934,784

7,076,706

6,451,539

(b) Equity instrument disclosures relating to key 
management personnel

Details of options provided as remuneration to KMP and shares issued 
on the exercise of such, together with terms and conditions can be 
found in the remuneration report.

139

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
31.  Reconciliation of profit after  

income tax to net cash inflow  
from operating activities

32.  Earnings per share

(a) Basic earnings per share

Profit for the year

Depreciation and amortisation

Non-cash employee benefits expense - share-based payments

Finance costs

Net (gain) / loss on sale of non-current assets

Movement in ECL through profit or loss

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

72,691

62,945

25,832

18,638

3,213

1,493

(21)

267

3,305

1,495

(38)

34

(increase)/decrease in trade and other receivables and contract 
assets

(16,804)

14,192

(increase)/decrease in prepayments and other current assets

(2,578)

1,959

Basic earnings per share (cents per share)

Diluted earnings per share (cents per share)

Profit used for calculating basic and diluted earnings  
per share ($'000)

2021
Cents

2020
Cents

22.64

19.75 

22.52

19.61 

72,691

62,945

(b) Weighted average number of shares used  
as denominator

Weighted average number of ordinary shares used as 
the denominator in calculating basic earnings per share

321,074,997

318,659,285

2021
Number

2020
Number

(increase)/decrease in tax assets and liabilities

13,010

3,548

Adjustments for calculation of diluted earnings per share:

Increase / (decrease) in trade creditors

(556)

(3,967)

Options

1,667,676

2,295,131

Country of 
Incorporation

Class of shares

2021%

2020%

Equity holding

Increase / (decrease) in provisions

Increase / (decrease) in lease liabilities

308

2,265

1,983

2,827

Weighted average number of ordinary and potential 
ordinary shares used as the denominator in 
calculating diluted earnings per share

322,742,673

320,954,416

Malaysia

Ordinary

100

100

Increase / (decrease) in deferred revenue

15,867

(3,410)

Net cash inflow / (outflow) from operating activities

114,987

103,511

New Zealand

Ordinary

100

100

27.  Remuneration of auditors
During the year, the following fees were paid or payable for services 
provided by the auditor of the consolidated entity:

(a) Ernst & Young (Australia)

(b) Transactions with related parties

The parent entity entered into the following transactions during the 
year with related parties in the wholly owned group:

 • Loans were advanced and repayments received on short-term 

intercompany accounts.

2021
$

2020
$

 • Marketing support and management fees were charged to wholly 

owned controlled entities.

Fees to Ernst and Young (Australia)

Fees for auditing the statutory financial report of the parent 
covering the group and auditing the statutory financial reports 
of any controlled entities

728,603

801,795

Fees for assurance services that are required by legislation

-

-

 • Dividends were paid from Technology One New Zealand Limited 

to the parent entity during the year

These transactions were undertaken on commercial terms and 
conditions. No allowance for expected credit loss has been 
recognised for amounts due to and receivable from related parties.

Fees for other assurance and agreed-upon-procedure services

212,816

174,440

Fees for other services

170,131

148,290

The ownership interest in related parties in the wholly owned group is 
set out in note 30.

Total remuneration of Ernst & Young Australia

1,111,550

1,124,525

The relative ratio of other services to audit and assurance services 
was 15% (2020: 13%).

28.  Contingencies
TechnologyOne is a global business and from time to time in the 
ordinary course of business it receives enquiries from various 
regulators and government bodies. TechnologyOne cooperates fully 
with all enquiries and these enquiries do not require disclosure in their 
initial state, however should the Group become aware that an enquiry 
is developing further or if any regulator or government action is taken 
against the group, appropriate disclosure is made in accordance with 
the relevant accounting standards.  

As a global business, from time to time TechnologyOne is also subject 
to various claims and litigation from third parties during the ordinary 
course of its business. The Directors of TechnologyOne have given 
consideration to such matters which are or may be subject to claims or 
litigation at year end and, unless specific provisions have been made, 
are of the opinion that no material contingent liability for such claims 
of litigation exists. The group had no material contingent assets or 
liabilities.

Guarantees

At 30 September 2021, the Group had $3,694,124 (2020: $3,397,831) 
in outstanding bank performance guarantees. The total available 
guarantee facility is $7,000,000 (2020: $6,650,000). The Group also 
had unused foreign currency dealing limits of $1,199,814  
(2020: $1,606,393).

The parent entity, Technology One Limited, continues to support its 
subsidiaries in their operations, by way of financial support.

29.  Related party transactions

(a) Ultimate controlling entity

The ultimate controlling entity of the consolidated entity is Technology 
One Limited, a company incorporated in Australia.

30.  Controlled entities
The consolidated financial statements incorporate the assets, liabilities 
and results of the following subsidiaries in accordance with the 
accounting policy described in note 1(b):

Name of entity

Technology One 
Corporation Sdn Bhd

Technology One New 
Zealand Ltd

Technology One UK 
Limited

Icon Solution Unit Trust 
(ICON)

Icon Strategic Solutions 
Pty Ltd

Jeff Roorda and 
Associates Pty Ltd (JRA)

Scientia Resource 
Management Limited 
(UK)

England

Ordinary

Avand Pty Ltd

Australia

Ordinary

Desktop Mapping 
Systems Pty Ltd (DMS)

Digital Mapping Solutions 
NZ Limited (DMS)

Australia

Ordinary

New Zealand

Ordinary

Boldridge Pty Ltd

Australia

Ordinary

Australia

Ordinary

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

Australia

Ordinary

100

100

Australia

Ordinary

100

100

England

Ordinary

100

0

The parent entity is Technology One Limited, a public company,  
limited by shares and is domiciled in Brisbane, Australia and whose 
shares are traded on the Australian Securities Exchange. All entities 
operate in the software industry in their geographical locations. 

The Registered office is located at:

Technology One HQ 
Level 11, 
540 Wickham Street, 
Fortitude Valley, Qld, 4006

There are no potentially dilutive share instruments not included in the 
calculation of diluted earnings per share.

There have been no transactions involving ordinary shares or potential 
ordinary shares that would significantly change the number of ordinary 
shares or potential ordinary shares outstanding between the reporting 
date and the date of completion of these financial statements.

33.  Share-based payments

(a) Employee option plan

Options are granted to employees at the discretion of the Board 
based on the option plan approved by the Board.

TechnologyOne issues options with up to 25% discount on the volume 
weighted average price for the 10 days prior to the grant date. 

The period available between vesting date and expiry date of each 
option is five years. There are no cash settlement alternatives.

Each option entitles the holder to purchase one share. Options 
granted as part of remuneration are based on values determined 
using the Black-Scholes option pricing model.

141

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
 
 
33.  Share-based payments (continued)
Set out below are summaries of options granted under the plan:

33.  Share-based payments (continued)
Set out below are summaries of options granted under the plan:

Balance at start  
of the period 
Number

Issued during the 
year  
Number

Exercised during 
the period 
Number

Forfeited during 
the period 
Number

Balance at the end 
of the period 
Number

Vested and 
exercisable at end 
of the period 
Number

Balance at start of the 
period 
Number

Issued during the 
year  
Number

Exercised during 
the period 
Number

Forfeited during 
the period 
Number

Balance at the end 
of the period 
Number

Vested and 
exercisable at end 
of the period 
Number

Issue date

Expiry date

Exercise price

2021

30/03/2021

30/11/2028

           5.8850 

22/01/2021

30/11/2028

           5.8850 

22/01/2021

30/11/2028

           7.8467 

22/01/2021

30/11/2027

           5.8850 

1/07/2020

1/10/2027

             1.8914 

1/10/2019

1/10/2027

                       -   

1/10/2019

1/10/2027

           7.3854 

1/10/2019

1/10/2027

            5.5391 

1/10/2018

1/10/2026

             4.1122 

1/10/2018

1/10/2026

           5.4829 

1/10/2018

1/07/2026

            1.5862 

1/10/2018

1/10/2025

             4.1166 

30/04/2018

1/10/2025

           4.9952 

1/10/2018

1/07/2025

           0.8633 

1/10/2018

1/07/2025

            1.5862 

1/10/2018

1/07/2025

             1.8914 

-

-

-

-

50,000

1,691

578,551

913,938

988,325

390,520

12,500

313,582

100,101

29,250

12,500

50,000

1/10/2017

1/10/2025

            5.1456 

1,565,170

1/10/2017

1/10/2024

            5.1456 

1/10/2017

1/10/2025

           5.7474 

1/07/2018

1/07/2026

            1.3388 

1/07/2018

1/10/2026

             4.1122 

1/07/2017

1/07/2024

           0.8633 

23/05/2017

1/10/2024

           5.6046 

10/03/2017

1/10/2024

           5.6027 

1/10/2016

1/10/2024

           5.7474 

1/07/2016

1/07/2023

           0.8633 

1/07/2015

1/07/2022

           0.8633 

25/08/2010

25/08/2023

           0.3450 

25/08/2011

25/08/2024

           0.3450 

50,000

11,177

167,000

22,853

16,650

155,482

22,516

17,000

16,650

16,650

30,000

30,000

11,064

644,990

540,801

116,938

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(12,500)

(290,783)

(100,101)

(12,500)

(12,500)

-

-

(32,788)

-

(7,654)

-

(1,691)

-

(109,170)

(89,246)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(1,410,064)

(63,092)

(50,000)

-

(167,000)

-

-

(155,482)

(22,516)

(17,000)

(1,350)

(16,650)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

11,064

612,202

540,801

109,284

50,000

-

578,551

804,768

899,079

390,520

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Issue date

Expiry date

Exercise price

2020

1/10/2019

1/10/2027

                       -   

1/10/2019

1/10/2027

           7.3854 

1/10/2019

1/10/2027

            5.5391 

1/10/2018

1/10/2026

             4.1122 

1/10/2018

1/10/2026

           5.4829 

1/10/2018

1/07/2026

            1.5862 

1/10/2018

1/07/2026

             1.8914 

1/10/2018

1/10/2025

             4.1166 

1/10/2018

1/07/2025

             1.0313 

1/10/2018

1/10/2025

           4.9952 

1/10/2018

1/07/2025

           0.8633 

22,799

22,799

1/10/2018

1/07/2025

            1.5862 

-

16,750

-

50,000

92,014

-

11,177

-

22,853

16,650

-

-

-

-

16,750

-

50,000

92,014

-

11,177

-

-

16,650

-

-

-

1/10/2018

1/07/2025

             1.8914 

1/10/2017

1/10/2025

            5.1456 

1/10/2017

1/10/2024

            5.1456 

1/10/2017

1/10/2025

           5.7474 

1/07/2018

1/07/2026

            1.3388 

1/07/2018

1/07/2025

            1.3388 

1/07/2018

1/10/2026

             4.1122 

1/07/2017

1/07/2024

           0.8633 

23/05/2017

1/10/2024

           5.6046 

7/04/2017

30/09/2024

                       -   

10/03/2017

1/10/2024

           5.6027 

14/02/2017

1/10/2024

           5.0688 

7/02/2017

1/10/2024

           5.2334 

15,300

15,300

1/10/2016

1/10/2024

           5.7474 

-

30,000

30,000

-

30,000

30,000

1/10/2016

1/10/2024

                       -   

1/07/2016

1/07/2023

           0.8633 

1/07/2015

1/07/2022

           0.8633 

Total

5,562,106

1,313,793

(2,268,446)

(303,641)

4,303,812

284,690

25/08/2009

25/08/2022

           0.3450 

Weighted average exercise price

$4.93

$6.69

$4.67

$5.05

$5.60

$2.77

25/08/2010

25/08/2023

           0.3450 

25/08/2011

25/08/2024

           0.3450 

-

-

-

1,003,568

390,520

12,500

50,000

313,582

176,667

100,101

250,250

12,500

50,000

1,593,113

50,000

11,177

167,000

167,000

22,853

29,150

247,373

978

22,516

50,000

50,000

762,737

10,000

29,150

16,650

30,000

30,000

30,000

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

29,250

12,500

50,000

-

-

-

-

-

-

16,650

155,482

-

1,691

578,551

913,938

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(50,000)

-

-

-

-

(15,243)

-

-

-

-

(151,667)

(25,000)

1,691

578,551

913,938

988,325

390,520

12,500

-

313,582

-

100,101

29,250

12,500

50,000

(27,943)

1,565,170

-

-

-

-

-

-

50,000

11,177

167,000

-

22,853

16,650

(46,375)

155,482

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(221,000)

-

-

-

-

-

-

(167,000)

-

(12,500)

(45,516)

(978)

-

(50,000)

(50,000)

10,000

(657,788)

(97,949)

-

-

-

-

-

-

(10,000)

(12,500)

-

(30,000)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

22,516

22,516

-

-

17,000

-

16,650

16,650

-

30,000

30,000

-

-

17,000

-

16,650

16,650

-

30,000

30,000

Weighted average exercise price

$4.27

$6.10

$3.60

$4.97

$4.93

$3.27

5,679,385

1,554,180

(1,458,949)

(212,510)

5,562,106

396,698

143

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements  
  
33.  Share-based payments  

(continued)

34.  Parent entity financial  

information

At September 2021 a total of 4,303,812 options (2020: 5,562,106) 
were offered to employees. 

(a) Summary financial information

The individual financial statements for the parent entity show the 
following aggregate amounts:

35.  Events after the reporting  

period

On 23 November 2021, the Directors of Technology One Limited 
declared a final dividend on ordinary shares in respect of the 2021 
financial year. The total amount of the dividend is $32,454,363 and is 
60% franked.

No other matter or circumstance has occurred subsequent to period 
end that has significantly affected, or may significantly affect, the 
operations of the Group, the results of those operations or the state of 
affairs of the Group or economic entity in subsequent financial years.

The weighted average share price at the date of exercise of options 
exercised during the year ended 30 September 2021 was $4.67 
(2020: $3.60).

The weighted average remaining contractual life of share options 
outstanding at the end of the period was 6 years (2020: 6.0 years).

Fair value of options granted

The fair value of the equity-settled options is measured at the 
reporting date taking into account the terms and conditions upon 
which the instruments were granted.

The fair value of options granted during the year was between $1.77 
and $2.66 (2020: $1.93 - $3.39).

The model inputs for options granted during the year ended 30 
September 2021 included:

(I)  Dividend yield of 1.6% (2020: 1.6%)

(II) Expected volatility 33.54% (2020: 29.5%)

(III) Risk-free interest rate 0.01% (2020: 0.62 –1.89%)

(IV) Expected life of option 3.3 years (2020: 3.3 years)

(V) Option exercise price between $7.85 and $5.88  

 (2020: $7.39 - $5.54)

(VI) Weighted average share price at grant date was $7.85  

 (2020: $7.39)

Balance sheet

Current assets

Non-current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Shareholders' equity

Contributed equity

Dividend reserve

Share option reserve

Retaining earnings

The expected volatility reflects the assumption that the historical 
volatility of the Group’s share price over a period similar to the life of 
the options is indicative of future trends, which may not necessarily be 
the actual outcome.

Profit or loss before tax for the year

Total comprehensive income

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

212,771

181,777

225,836

197,068

438,607

378,845

198,267

178,175

32,602

37,086

230,869

215,261

51,645

40,551

32,454

30,046

38,305

31,342

85,283

62,278

207,687

164,217

92,260

75,787

92,260

75,787

(b) Executive performance rights 

After further market consultation, the Group made the decision to 
return to issuing options or EPRs. Please refer to section 3 of the 
remuneration report for further information.

(c) Expenses arising from share-based payment transactions

Total expenses arising from share-based payment transactions 
recognised during the year as part of employee benefit expense  
were as follows:

Options issued under employee option plan:

Vested

Forfeited

Total share-based payment expense

2021
$’000

2020
$’000

3,404

3,355

(192)

(50)

3,212

3,305

At 30 September 2021, the statement of financial position shows a 
current liability balance of $198m (30 September 2020: $178m) which 
is largely attributable to the Deferred Revenue balance in current 
liabilities. As Deferred Revenue represents payments received or 
receivable in advance from customers for SaaS Fees and Annual 
Licence Fees which will be recognised in future periods, and not a 
future cash outflow, this balance does not impact the Group’s ability to 
meet its short-term obligations as and when they fall due.

(b) Guarantees entered into by the parent entity

At 30 September 2021, the Group had $3,694,124 (2020: $3,397,831) 
in outstanding bank performance guarantees. The total available 
guarantee facility is $7,000,000 (2020: $6,650,000). The Group 
also had unused foreign currency dealing limits of $1,199,814 (2020: 
$1,606,393).

The parent entity, Technology One Limited, continues to support its 
subsidiaries in their operations, by way of financial support.

(c) Contingent liabilities of the parent entity

At 30 September 2021 and 30 September 2020, the parent entity had 
no contingent liabilities.

145

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
 
 
 
 
Directors' declaration

In accordance with a resolution of the Directors of Technology One Limited, I state that:

In the opinion of the Directors:

(a) 

the financial statements and notes set out on pages 118 to 121 are in accordance with the Corporations Act 2001, including:

(i) giving a true and fair view of the consolidated entity's financial position as at 30 September 2021 and of its performance for the  
  year ended on that date; and

(ii) complying with Australian Accounting Standards (including the Australian Accounting Interpretations) and the Corporations 
  Regulations 2001;

(b) 

the financial statements and notes also comply with International Financial Reporting Standards as disclosed in note 1(a); and

(c) 

(d) 

there are reasonable grounds to believe that the Group will be able to pay its debts as and when they become due and payable; 
and

this declaration has been made after receiving the declarations required to be made to the Directors in accordance with section 
295A of the Corporations Act 2001 for the reporting year ended 30 September 2021.

On behalf of the Board of Directors

Adrian Di Marco 
Director 
Brisbane 
23 November 2021

Ernst & Young
111 Eagle Street
Brisbane  QLD  4000 Australia
GPO Box 7878 Brisbane  QLD  4001

Tel: +61 7 3011 3333
Fax: +61 7 3011 3100
ey.com/au

Auditor’s Independence Declaration to the Directors of Technology
One Limited

As lead auditor for the audit of the financial report of Technology One Limited for the financial year
ended 30 September 2021, I declare to the best of my knowledge and belief, there have been:

a. No contraventions of the auditor independence requirements of the Corporations Act 2001 in

relation to the audit;

b. No contraventions of any applicable code of professional conduct in relation to the audit; and

c. No non-audit services provided that contravene any applicable code of professional conduct in

relation to the audit.

This declaration is in respect of Technology One Limited and the entities it controlled during the
financial year

Ernst & Young

Alison de Groot
Partner
23 November 2021

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation

147

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statements 
 
Ernst & Young
111 Eagle Street
Brisbane  QLD  4000 Australia
GPO Box 7878 Brisbane  QLD  4001

Tel: +61 7 3011 3333
Fax: +61 7 3011 3100
ey.com/au

Independent auditor’s report to the members of Technology One Limited

Report on the audit of the financial report

Opinion
We have audited the financial report of Technology One Limited (the Company)and its subsidiaries
(collectively the Group), which comprises the consolidated statement of financial position as at 30
September 2021, the consolidated income statement, the consolidated statement of comprehensive
income, consolidated statement of changes in equity and consolidated statement of cash flows for the
year then ended, notes to the financial statements, including a summary of significant accounting
policies, and the directors’ declaration.

In our opinion, the accompanying financial report of the Group is in accordance with the Corporations
Act 2001, including:

a. Giving a true and fair view of the consolidated financial position of the Group as at 30 September

2021 and of its consolidated financial performance for the year ended on that date; and

b. Complying with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Regulations 2001.

Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with Australian Auditing Standards. Our responsibilities under
those standards are further described in the Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial
report section of our report. We are independent of the Group in accordance with the auditor
independence requirements of the Corporations Act 2001 and the ethical requirements of the
Accounting Professional and Ethical Standards Board’s APES 110 Code of Ethics for Professional
Accountants (including Independence Standards) (the Code) that are relevant to our audit of the
financial report in Australia. We have also fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with
the Code.

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis
for our opinion.

Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgment, were of most significance in
our audit of the financial report of the current year. These matters were addressed in the context of
our audit of the financial report as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, but we do not provide
a separate opinion on these matters. For each matter below, our description of how our audit
addressed the matter is provided in that context.

We have fulfilled the responsibilities described in the Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the
financial report section of our report, including in relation to these matters. Accordingly, our audit
included the performance of procedures designed to respond to our assessment of the risks of
material misstatement of the financial report. The results of our audit procedures, including the
procedures performed to address the matters below, provide the basis for our audit opinion on the
accompanying financial report.

Measurement and recognition of revenue and associated assets and liabilities

Why significant

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

The Group has the following key revenue streams:

Our audit procedures included the following:

► SaaS fees;
► Annual licence fees;
► Initial licence fees; and
► Consulting services

The Group contracts with its customers using written
contracts which often include a number of products
and services (separately identifiable components).
Revenue recognition for these contracts was
considered to be a key audit matter due to the
complexity of contracts and the judgement required
to allocate revenue amongst the respective
performance obligations.

Note 1(d) to the financial statements details the
Group’s revenue streams and the associated
accounting policies. Revenue is disclosed in Note 5,
associated assets in Note 9 and Note 10 and
associated liabilities in Note 16.

► For a sample of signed customer contracts, we

obtained the supporting documentation and
assessed management’s judgement on whether
the revenue has been recorded appropriately.
The assessment included whether there were
contract modifications and the impact of any
delayed payment terms.

► The testing of the signed customer contracts

(including contract modifications and
conversion of initial licences to SaaS
arrangements) considered:

 The determination of stand-alone price for

separately identifiable components;

 The allocation of the transaction price to
identified performance obligations,
separated into the different revenue
streams, and;

 The timing of revenue recognition based

on the satisfaction of performance
obligations.

► For a sample of consulting service contracts,
(time and materials) we assessed the Group’s
controls associated with the recording of
consulting days delivered and the application of
contracted fee rates to these days.

► For deferred revenue (contract liabilities) and

contract assets, we tested a sample of balances
at year end that included:

 Agreeing the amounts recorded to invoice

and payment (where received);

 Reperforming the recognition of revenue
based on the satisfaction of performance
obligations; and

 Recalculating the amount of the contract
asset or contract liability balance at year
end.

► Assessed the adequacy of the financial report

disclosures included in the financial statements.

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation

149

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statementsCapitalisation of software development costs

Why significant

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

As set out in Note 13 to the financial statements the
Group capitalises costs related to the development of
software products. Software development is core to
the Company’s operations and requires judgement as
to whether it meets the capitalisation criteria of AASB
138 Intangible Assets. The carrying value of the
capitalised assets (Software under development and
software-in use) totalled $90.99m as disclosed in
Note 13.

The capitalisation of software development costs was
a key audit matter due to the significant management
judgements, including:

► Whether the costs incurred relate to research

costs, which are required to be expensed or
development costs that are eligible for
capitalisation;

► The assessment of the useful life of the asset

and the timing of amortisation;

► The assessment of future economic benefits

and indications of impairment of the capitalised
software development costs.

We performed the following procedures in respect of
the development costs capitalised:

► Assessed the Group’s policy of capitalisation of
software development costs for compliance
with Australian Accounting Standards.

► Held inquiries with Project Directors and other

project team members, to understand
development activities undertaken and the
feasibility of completion.

► For a sample of capitalised software

development costs, we tested whether
additions were appropriately supported to
payroll records or third party documentation
and attributed to development activities.

► Considered the appropriateness of the

amortisation period for the capitalised software
development costs and the timing of
amortisation.

► Assessed the completeness of the Group’s

indicators of impairment of capitalised software
development costs.

► Assessed the adequacy of the financial report

disclosures included in the financial statements.

Information other than the financial report and auditor’s report thereon
The directors are responsible for the other information. The other information comprises the
information included in the Company’s 2021 annual report other than the financial report and our
auditor’s report thereon. We obtained the directors’ report that is to be included in the annual report,
prior to the date of this auditor’s report, and we expect to obtain the remaining sections of the annual
report after the date of this auditor’s report.

Our opinion on the financial report does not cover the other information and we do not and will not
express any form of assurance conclusion thereon, with the exception of the Remuneration Report
and our related assurance opinion.

In connection with our audit of the financial report, our responsibility is to read the other information
and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial
report or our knowledge obtained in the audit or otherwise appears to be materially misstated.

If, based on the work we have performed on the other information obtained prior to the date of this
auditor’s report, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are
required to report that fact. We have nothing to report in this regard.

Responsibilities of the directors for the financial report
The directors of the Company are responsible for the preparation of the financial report that gives a
true and fair view in accordance with Australian Accounting Standards and the Corporations Act 2001
and for such internal control as the directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of the
financial report that gives a true and fair view and is free from material misstatement, whether due to
fraud or error.

In preparing the financial report, the directors are responsible for assessing the Group’s ability to
continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters relating to going concern and using the
going concern basis of accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate the Group or to cease
operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial report
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial report as a whole is
free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that
includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an
audit conducted in accordance with the Australian Auditing Standards will always detect a material
misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material
if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic
decisions of users taken on the basis of this financial report.

As part of an audit in accordance with the Australian Auditing Standards, we exercise professional
judgment and maintain professional scepticism throughout the audit. We also:

► Identify and assess the risks of material misstatement of the financial report, whether due to

fraud or error, design and perform audit procedures responsive to those risks, and obtain audit
evidence that is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion. The risk of not
detecting a material misstatement resulting from fraud is higher than for one resulting from
error, as fraud may involve collusion, forgery, intentional omissions, misrepresentations, or the
override of internal control.

► Obtain an understanding of internal control relevant to the audit in order to design audit

procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an
opinion on the effectiveness of the Group’s internal control.

► Evaluate the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of accounting

estimates and related disclosures made by the directors.

► Conclude on the appropriateness of the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting
and, based on the audit evidence obtained, whether a material uncertainty exists related to
events or conditions that may cast significant doubt on the Group’s ability to continue as a going
concern. If we conclude that a material uncertainty exists, we are required to draw attention in
our auditor’s report to the related disclosures in the financial report or, if such disclosures are
inadequate, to modify our opinion. Our conclusions are based on the audit evidence obtained up
to the date of our auditor’s report. However, future events or conditions may cause the Group to
cease to continue as a going concern.

► Evaluate the overall presentation, structure and content of the financial report, including the

disclosures, and whether the financial report represents the underlying transactions and events
in a manner that achieves fair presentation.

► Obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding the financial information of the entities or

business activities within the Group to express an opinion on the financial report. We are
responsible for the direction, supervision and performance of the Group audit. We remain solely
responsible for our audit opinion.

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation

151

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statementsWe communicate with the directors regarding, among other matters, the planned scope and timing of
the audit and significant audit findings, including any significant deficiencies in internal control that we
identify during our audit.

We also provide the directors with a statement that we have complied with relevant ethical
requirements regarding independence, and to communicate with them all relationships and other
matters that may reasonably be thought to bear on our independence, and where applicable, actions
taken to eliminate threats or safeguards applied.

From the matters communicated to the directors, we determine those matters that were of most
significance in the audit of the financial report of the current year and are therefore the key audit
matters. We describe these matters in our auditor’s report unless law or regulation precludes public
disclosure about the matter or when, in extremely rare circumstances, we determine that a matter
should not be communicated in our report because the adverse consequences of doing so would
reasonably be expected to outweigh the public interest benefits of such communication.

Report on the audit of the Remuneration Report

Opinion on the Remuneration Report

We have audited the Remuneration Report included within the Directors’ Report for the year ended 30
September 2021.

In our opinion, the Remuneration Report of Technology One Limited for the year ended 30 September
2021, complies with section 300A of the Corporations Act 2001 .

Responsibilities
The directors of the Company are responsible for the preparation and presentation of the
Remuneration Report in accordance with section 300A of the Corporations Act 2001 . Our
responsibility is to express an opinion on the Remuneration Report, based on our audit conducted in
accordance with Australian Auditing Standards.

Ernst & Young

Alison de Groot
Partner
Brisbane
23 November 2021

Jennifer Barker
Partner
Brisbane
23 November 2021

A member firm of Ernst & Young Global Limited
Liability limited by a scheme approved under Professional Standards Legislation

Shareholder information

The shareholder information set out below was applicable as at 06 December 2021.

(a) Distribution of equity securities

Number of shares

1-1,000

1,001 – 5,000

5,001 – 10,000

10,001 – 100,000

100,001 and over

Number of shareholders

4,917

4,885

1,269

1,199

64

There were 164 holders of less than a marketable parcel of ordinary shares.

(b) Equity security holders

Twenty largest quoted equity security holders

Name

JL Mactaggart Holdings Pty Ltd 1

Fundsmith (London) 2

Masterbah Pty Ltd 1

Vinva Investment Management (Sydney)

Selector Funds Mgt (Sydney)

Hyperion Investor Mgt (Brisbane)

Wasatch Global Investors (Salt Lake City)

State Street Global Advisors (Sydney)

First Sentier Investors (Sydney)

Argo Investments (Adelaide)

Dimensional Fund Advisors (Sydney)

BlackRock Investment Management (Sydney)

BlackRock Investment Management (San Francisco)

Vanguard Group (Philadelphia)

Macquarie Asset Management (Sydney)

Acadian Asset Mgt (Boston)

Pendal Group (Sydney)

Mondrian Investment Partners (London)

Lennox Capital Partners (Sydney)

Walter Scott & Partners (Edinburgh)

Number held

%IC

26,902,500

8.34%

18,841,086

5.84%

17,378,500

5.39%

13,767,228

4.27%

12,157,993

10,143,104

3.77%

3.14%

9,085,974

2.82%

8,952,639

2.77%

8,396,859

2.60%

6,784,564

6,306,246

5,597,121

5,490,376

5,429,294

5,176,058

5,017,279

4,901,587

4,864,792

4,796,723

4,500,000

2.10%

1.95%

1.73%

1.70%

1.68%

1.60%

1.55%

1.52%

1.51%

1.49%

1.39%

184,489,923

57.18%

1 Substantial holder (including associate holdings) in Technology One Limited.

2In their capacity as an investment manager, the following have lodged Form 604 notices as a Substantial Shareholder under section 608 of the Corporations Act: Fundsmith Group (5.00% as at 
01/03/21)

(c) Voting rights 

All ordinary shares issued by Technology One Limited carry one vote per share without restriction.  Options and Performance 
Rights have no voting rights.

153

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statementsCorporate directory - Technology One Limited

Corporate calendar

Board of Directors

Adrian Di Marco

Pat O'Sullivan

Ron McLean

John Mactaggart

Richard Anstey

Jane Andrews

Sharon Doyle

Cliff Rosenberg

Peter Ball

Company Secretary

Stephen Kennedy

Paul Jobbins

Australian Business Number

84 010 487 180

Registered Office

Technology One Limited

Level 11, TechnologyOne HQ

540 Wickham Street

Fortitude Valley  QLD  4006

Australia

www.TechnologyOneCorp.com

P. 1800 671 978

International: +617 3167 7300

Branch Locations

Lawyer

The following calendar shows the planned dates for significant shareholder events for the 2022 Year. 
These dates are subject to change.  The declaration of dividends is subject to board approval.

Brisbane

Sydney

Melbourne

Canberra

Adelaide

Perth

Hobart

Auckland

Wellington

Kuala Lumpur

Maidenhead

Auditor

Ernst & Young

Level 51, 111 Eagle Street

Brisbane QLD 4000

www.ey.com/au

McCullough Robertson

Level 11, 66 Eagle Street

Brisbane QLD 4000

www.mccullough.com.au

Share Registry

Link Market Services Limited

Locked Bag A14

Sydney NSW 1235

Phone: 02 8280 7454

Fax: 02 9287 0303

www.linkmarketservices.com.au

Stock Exchange Listing

Australian Securities Exchange  

(ASX: TNE)

2022 (Year Ending 30 September 2022)

Annual General Meeting

Announcement of Half Year Results for 2022

Media Interviews

Presentations to Institutions – Sydney (tentative)

Presentations to Institutions – Melbourne (tentative)

Ex-Dividend for 2022 Interim Dividend

Record Date for 2022 Interim Dividend

Payment Date for 2022 Interim Dividend

Announcement of Full Year Results for 2022

Media Interviews

Presentations to Institutions – Sydney (tentative)

Presentations to Institutions – Melbourne (tentative)

Distribute 2022 Sustainability Report

Ex-Dividend for 2022 Final Dividend

Record Date for 2022 Final Dividend

Payment Date for 2022 Final Dividend

Distribute 2022 Annual Report

Annual General Meeting (2022 tentative)

Notes:

23 February 2022

24 May 2022

24 May 2022

25 & 26 May 2022 

27 May 2022

2 June 2022

3 June 2022

17 June 2022

22 November 2022

22 November 2022

23 & 24 November 2022

25 November 2022

30 November 2022

1 December 2022

2 December 2022

16 December 2022

16 January 2023

22 February 2023

Closing date for receipt of director nominations is 4 January 2022 in accordance with ASX Listing Rule 14.3 (35 days prior to AGM)

The Ex-Dividend date occurs one day before the Record Date

The Record Date is 5.00pm on the date TechnologyOne closes its share register to determine which shareholders are entitled to receive the current dividend

The Payment Date is the date on which TechnologyOne’s dividend is paid to shareholders.  The payment date is approximately 10 business days after the Record Date.

Closing date for receipt of director nominations is 3 January 2023 in accordance with ASX Listing Rule 14.3 (35 days prior to AGM)

155

Transforming business, making life simpleFinancial statementsTechnologyOne (ASX: TNE) is Australia’s largest enterprise 
software company and one of Australia’s top 150 ASX-listed 
companies, with locations across six countries. We provide 
a global SaaS ERP solution that transforms business and 
makes life simple for our customers. Our deeply integrated 
enterprise SaaS solution is available on any device, anywhere 
and any time and is incredibly easy to use. Over 1,200 
leading corporations, government agencies, local councils 
and universities are powered by our software. For more than 
34 years, we have been providing our customers enterprise 
software that evolves and adapts to new and emerging 
technologies, allowing them to focus on their business and  
not technology.

ABN: 84 010 487 180

2
0
2
1
A
n
n
u
a

l

R
e
p
o
r
t

TechnologyOneCorp.com

Australia | New Zealand | South Pacific | Asia | United Kingdom

Freecall 1800 671 978 (within Australia) | +617 3167 7300 (outside Australia)

l

T
e
c
h
n
o
o
g
y
O
n
e
L
m

i

i
t
e
d